TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
.............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
...........................7
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................65
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
.................................137
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................205
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
.............................................265
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................277
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
................................................319
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
.......................................337
10
INDEX
...................................................................345
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE:
After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
1
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures, which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures,
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety
and may lead to an accident resulting in serious
injury or death.
Vehicle Identification Number
6 INTRODUCTION
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys
................. 9
▫ Ignition Key Removal ................... 9
▫ Locking Doors With The Key ..............10
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder ................10
䡵 Sentry Key — If Equipped
................11
▫ Replacement Keys ......................12
▫ Sentry Key Programming .................12
▫ General Information ....................13
䡵 Steering Wheel Lock — Manual
Transmission Only
......................13
▫ If You Wish To Manually Lock
The Steering Wheel .....................13
▫ To Release The Steering Wheel Lock .........13
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition
Interlock System .......................14
䡵 Door Locks
...........................14
▫ Manual Door Locks .....................14
▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..........15
▫ “Child-Protection” Door Lock System
(Rear Doors) ..........................18
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped
........19
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate ..........20
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate ............21
▫ Using The Panic Alarm: ..................21
2
▫ To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock” ........21
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters ........22
▫ General Information ....................23
▫ Battery Replacement ....................23
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped
.......24
▫ ToSetTheAlarm ......................25
▫ To Disarm The System ...................25
▫ Security System Manual Override ...........25
䡵 Liftgate
..............................26
䡵 Power Windows— If Equipped
.............27
▫ Power Window Switches .................27
▫ Auto Down ..........................28
▫ Window Lockout Switch .................28
䡵 Occupant Restraints
.....................28
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts .....................29
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ....33
▫ Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder
Belt Operating Instructions ...............34
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners ...................37
▫ Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder
System (BeltAlert) ......................37
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women ............39
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag ............39
▫ Child Restraint ........................54
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations
..........61
䡵 Safety Tips
............................61
▫ Exhaust Gas ..........................61
▫ Safety Checks You Should
Make Inside The Vehicle .................62
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle ................62
8 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the ignition switch to
the ACC position, push the key and cylinder inward,
rotate the key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.
NOTE:
If you try to remove the key before you place
the lever in PARK, the key may become trapped tempo-
rarily in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key
to the right slightly, then remove the key as described. If
a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Positions
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 9
2
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transaxle—If Equipped
Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position, push the
key and cylinder inward, rotate the key to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE:
With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
ignition, both the power door locks and Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) will not function.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SENTRY KEY — IF EQUIPPED
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after two (2) seconds
of running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle.
This system utilizes ignition keys, which have an elec-
tronic chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only
keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be
used to start and operate the vehicle.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this
indicates a problem with the electronics.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.
Keep in mind that a key, which has not been pro-
grammed is also considered an invalid key even if it is
cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
If the Theft Alarm/Immobilizer Light comes on during
normal vehicle operation, (the vehicle has been running
for longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in
the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
•
Exxon/Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not
cause a key-related (tran-
sponder) fault unless the additional part is physi-
cally held against the ignition key being used
when starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or
other RF electronics will not cause interference with
this system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one, which has never been
programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Sentry Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds, a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
The new Sentry Key has been programmed.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Repeat this procedure to program up to 8 keys. If you do
not have a programmed sentry key, contact your dealer
for details.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — Manual
Transmission Only
Your manual transmission vehicle is equipped with a
passive steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering
the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel
is moved no more than 1/2 turn in either direction and
the key is not in the ignition switch, the steering wheel
will lock.
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
NOTE:
If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
2
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC, or ON positions, and
the brake pedal is depressed.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
For personal security, and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Manual Door Lock Plunger
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A door lock switch is located on the driver door panel.
Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
2
Automatic Door Locks—If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The Automatic Door Lock feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Pro-
grammable Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual
for details.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Automatic
Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by performing the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
Power Door Lock Switches
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Depress the power door lock switch to lock the doors.
4. Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle.
Auto Unlock
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Auto Unlock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled.
Refer to “Personal Settings” (Customer Programmable
Features) in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — if equipped section of this manual.
Ignition Key Position
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
2
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto
Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
back to LOCK 4 times ending up in the LOCK position.
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the
doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
NOTE:
Use the Auto Door Locks and Auto Unlock
features in accordance with local laws.
“Child-Protection” Door Lock System (Rear
Doors)
Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
to the lock or unlock position.
Ignition Key Position
Child Protection Door Lock Location
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE:
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the panic alarm from distances a
maximum of 66 feet (20 meters) using a hand held radio
transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the
vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
Inserting Ignition Key
Three Button Transmitter
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
2
To unlock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock only the driver’s door or twice to unlock
all the doors and liftgate. When the UNLOCK button is
pressed, the illuminated entry will initiate, and the
parking lights will flash on twice. The time for this
feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock” under
“Personal Settings” in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) section of this manual for details.
NOTE:
The system can also be programmed to unlock
all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button. On
electronic vehicle information center (EVIC) equipped
vehicles refer to “Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st”
under “Personal Settings” in the EVIC section of this
manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles perform the
following steps:
The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors
upon the first UNLOCK button press by using the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
key fob.
2. Continue to hold the LOCK button at least 4 seconds,
but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the
UNLOCK button. A single chime will sound to indicate
that this feature has changed.
3. Release both buttons at the same time.
4. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle, by
pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the keyfob.
NOTE:
Pressing the LOCK button on the keyfob while
you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security
Alarm. Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the Security Alarm.
5. If the desired programming was not achieved or to
reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To lock the doors and liftgate:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chip once to acknowledge the lock signal. If
desired, the “Sound Horn On Lock” feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to “Personal Settings” in
the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” sec-
tion of this manual. On non EVIC – equipped vehicles
perform the following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after 4 seconds),
press the PANIC button. Release both buttons.
The “Sound Horn On Lock” and “Flash Lamps With
Lock” feature can be reactivated by repeating this proce-
dure.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the panic alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the panic alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or
if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
To Turn Off “Flash Lights With Lock”
NOTE:
The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be
turned on or off. On electronic vehicle information center
(EVIC) equipped vehicles refer to ⬙Personal Settings⬙ in
the EVIC section of this manual. On non EVIC - equipped
vehicles perform the following steps:
1. Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after 4 sec-
onds) press the LOCK button. Release both buttons.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2
3. Test the flash lamps with LOCK feature while outside
of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK button on the key
fob with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key
removed.
NOTE:
Pressing the LOCK button on the key fob, while
you are in the vehicle, will activate the Security Alarm.
Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will
cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to
deactivate the Security Alarm.
The “Flash Lights On Lock/Unlock” feature can be
reactivated by repeating this procedure.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Vehicles will be shipped from the assembly plants with
two key fob transmitters programmed only for that
vehicle. A total of eight fobs can be programmed for your
vehicle. Additional fobs can be programmed to your
vehicle through the use of a currently programmed fob.
NOTE:
When entering program mode using that fob,
all other programmed fobs will be erased and you will
have to reprogram them for your vehicle.
Use the Following procedure to program additional key
fobs if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key:
1. Enter your vehicle and close all doors.
2. Fasten your seat belt (Fastening the seatbelt will cancel
any chiming that may confuse you during this program-
ming procedure).
3. Place the key into the ignition.
4. Turn the ignition to the ON position ( Do not start the
engine ).
5. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the key fob.
6. After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds,
also press the PANIC button within 6 seconds.
7. When a single chime is heard release both buttons. The
chime is an indication that you have successfully entered
program mode. All fobs that are to be programmed must
be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was
heard.
8. Using the fob to be programmed, press and release
both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons, simultaneously.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. A single chime will be heard.
10. Within four seconds of hearing the chime, press and
release the UNLOCK button on the fob.
11. A single chime will be heard.
12. Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six
additional fobs.
13. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
14. Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60
seconds from when the original chime was heard. After
60 seconds, all programmed fobs function normally.
NOTE:
If you do not have a programmed transmitter,
contact your dealer for details.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your Remote Lock Control fails to operate from a
normal distance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling
may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
2
1. If the key fob is equipped with a screw, remove the
screw. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart.
Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during
removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To assemble the transmitter case, snap the two halves
together.
NOTE:
If the key fob is equipped with a screw, reinstall
and tighten the screw until snug.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The system monitors the doors, liftgate, and ignition
switch for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
about 18 minutes. For the first 3 minutes the horn will
sound and the headlights, park lights, tail lights and the
indicator light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior
lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
If the monitored system, which triggered the alarm is
deactivated the alarm will continue to sound until 3
minutes of alarm time is reached. If the monitored
system, which triggered the alarm is deactivated after the
alarm has been on for 3 minutes the alarm will shut off
immediately.
Separating Transmitter Halves
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To set the alarm:
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the door key, power door
lock switch, or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all
doors.
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
unlocked in any manner, the system will automatically
disarm. After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash
slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
To disarm the system:
Unlock a front door/liftgate using the Keyless Entry
Transmitter.
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm
the system. A valid key is one that is programmed to that
particular vehicle. A valid key will disarm the system, an
invalid key will trigger the alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the
alarm has been activated. Check the vehicle for tamper-
ing.
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
Door Lock Plunger
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
2
LIFTGATE
NOTE:
The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the remote keyless entry or by
activating the power door lock switches located on the
front doors. The central locking/unlocking feature (if
equipped) can also be activated from the liftgate key
cylinder.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
NOTE:
In the event of a power malfunction, or the
remote transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right (manual lock
models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the liftgate
open with one fluid motion.
NOTE:
Although the liftgate has no inside release
mechanism, the liftgate trim panel includes an opening
with a snap-in cap that provides access to release the
latch in the event of an electrical system malfunction.
Liftgate Handle
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
•
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
POWER WINDOWS— IF EQUIPPED
Power Window Switches
The control on the left front door has up-down switches
that give you finger tip control of all four power win-
dows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the
passenger doors for passenger window control. The
windows will operate only when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and for 45 seconds after the
ignition is turned OFF or the driver’s door is opened.
This feature can be turned off by your authorized dealer.
Power Window Switch Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2
Auto Down
The driver’s window switch has an Auto Down feature.
Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and
the window will go down automatically. To cancel the
Auto Down movement, operate the switch in either the
up or down direction and release the switch.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window lock button. To enable the window controls,
press the window control button again.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if
equipped, side airbags for both the driver and front
passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
also, can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
Lock Out Switch
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If your vehicle is equipped with the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) there will be a Passenger Airbag
Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light located on the center of
the instrument panel.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
2
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best.
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
2
WARNING!
•
A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is very
dangerous. Your body could strike the inside sur-
faces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head
and neck injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your
strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Positioning Lap Belt
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push anchorage button to release the anchor-
age, and move it up or down to the position that serves
you best.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
2
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a three
point seat belt with a mini latch and buckle, which allows
the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini buckle and shoulder belt can
then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel
for added convenience.
1. Remove the mini latch and regular latch from its
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
Adjustable Anchorage
Mini Latch Stowage
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the mini latch plate and pull the belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini
latch plate into the mini buckle until you hear a “click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
2
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
Connecting Mini Latch to Buckle
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
10. To disengage the mini latch from the mini buckle for
storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini buckle. The belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini latch plate into the slot
provided in the trim panel.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
sioners, both must be replaced.
Enhanced Driver Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert) will alert the driver to buckle their seat
Detaching Mini Latch and Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
2
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will continue to
chime and flash the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96
seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) will be reactivated
if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10
seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8
km/h).
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be en-
abled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by
following these steps:
NOTE:
The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. DaimlerChrysler does not recom-
mend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert).
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
NOTE:
Watch for the Seat Belt Warning Light to turn on
while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat belt.
It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have success-
fully completed the programming.
The Enhanced Warning System (BeltAlert) can be reacti-
vated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE:
Although the Enhanced Warning System
(BeltAlert) has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Warning
Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
NOTE:
The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
Inflatable Knee Bolster
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
2
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity and occupant size.
Also, the front passenger airbag is certified to the Federal
regulations that define Occupant Classification (Refer to
⬙Occupant Classification System⬙ in this section).
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You
may damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are in-
flating.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not attach cup holders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
Side Curtain Airbag Location
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the driver inflatable knee blocker and the integrated
passenger knee blocker (non-inflatable) to provide im-
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
NOTE:
The passenger front airbag may not deploy
even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant
Classification System (refer to ⬙Occupant Classification
System⬙ in this section) has determined the passenger
seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified
in the “child⬙ category. This could be a child, a teenager,
or even a small adult.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If
You Need Assistance⬙ in Section 9 of this manual.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front airbag deployment could
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate.
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
•
If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
The front airbag system consists of the following:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller
•
Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If equipped)
•
Airbag Warning Light
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Driver Airbag
•
Passenger Airbag
•
Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags (If equipped)
•
Side Curtain Airbags
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Interconnecting Wiring
•
Knee Impact Bolsters
•
Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
•
Front Acceleration Sensors
•
Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
Occupant Classification System (OCS) for the Front
Passenger Seat
−
Occupant Classification Module
−
Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD) Indicator Light
−
Weight Sensors
How The Airbag System Works
•
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are de-
signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC may
also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant
size provided by the Occupant Classification Module.
The ORC will not detect roll over.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or RUN positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the steering wheel and
column, and knee bolsters. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition,
the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
2
During a moderate-to-severe rear impact the ORC
may deploy the seat belt pretensioners alone.
Also, the ORC turns on the AIRBAG warn-
ing light and PAD indicator light in the
instrument panel for 6 to 8 seconds for a
self-check when the ignition is first turned
on. After the self-check, the AIRBAG warning light
will turn off. The PAD indicator light will function
normally (Refer to ⬙Passenger Airbag Disable (PAD)
Indicator Light⬙ in this section). If the ORC detects a
malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
AIRBAG warning light either momentarily or continu-
ously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
•
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part of
a Federally regulated safety system required for this
vehicle. It is designed to turn off the front passenger
airbag for occupants that weigh less than a very small
adult.
NOTE:
Children 12 years and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint.
•
The OCS classifies an occupant using weight sensors
mounted in the base of the front passenger seat. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the system.
Objects hanging on the seat or other passengers push-
ing down on the seat will also be sensed. The weight of
an adult will cause the system to turn the airbag on. In
this case, the OCS has classified the occupant of the
seat as an adult. An adult occupant needs to sit in a
normal position (with their feet on or near the floor) in
order to be properly classified. Reclining the seat back
too far may change how an occupant is classified by
the OCS.
•
The Passenger Airbag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light (an amber light located in the center of the
instrument panel) tells the driver and front passenger
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
when the front passenger airbag is turned off. The
PAD Indicator lamp illuminates the words ⬙PASS AIR
BAG OFF⬙ to show that the front passenger airbag will
not inflate during a collision requiring airbags. When
the right front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat, the passenger air
bag will not inflate even though the Passenger Airbag
Disable (PAD) indicator lamp is not illuminated.
The PAD indictor light should not be illuminated
when an adult passenger is properly seated in the
front passenger seat. In this case, the air bag is ready to
be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs.
For all other occupants, the PAD indicator light will be
illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag
is turned off and will not inflate.
NOTE:
Even though this vehicle is equipped with an
occupant classification system, children 12 years and
under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an
appropriate child restraint (see section on child re-
straints).
WARNING!
Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
airbag. A deploying passenger airbag can cause
death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing
infant seat.
Passenger Airbag Disabled Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Passenger Air-
bag Disable
(PAD) Indicator
Light
Airbag Status
Adult OFF ON
Child ON OFF
Grocery Bags,
Heavy Briefcases
and Other Rela-
tively Light Ob-
jects
ON OFF
Empty or Very
Small Objects
OFF* OFF
* Since the system senses weight, some small objects
will turn the PAD Indicator Light on.
Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding
in the front passenger seat. If an adult occupant’s weight
is transferred to another part of the vehicle (like the door
or instrument panel), the weight sensors in the seat may
not properly classify the occupant. Objects lodged under
the seat or between the seat and the center console can
prevent the occupant’s weight from being measured
properly and may result in the occupant being improp-
erly classified. Ensure that the front passenger seat back
does not touch anything placed on the second row of
seats because this can also affect occupant classification.
Also, if you fold down the seats in the second row check
to be sure they don’t touch the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way, it
should only be serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
seat is removed (or even if the seat attachment bolts are
loosened or tightened in any way), take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, the Airbag Warning
Light (a red light located in the center of the instrument
cluster directly in front of the driver) will be turned on.
This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. The Airbag Warning Light is turned on
whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light
are illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is
turned off until the fault is cleared. If an object is lodged
under the seat and interferes with operation of the weight
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
sensors, a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light. Once the
lodged object is removed, the fault will be automatically
cleared after a short period of time.
•
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
may be possible based on collision severity and occu-
pant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
•
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is lo-
cated beneath the front passenger seat. The OCM
classifies the occupant into categories based on the
measurements made by the seat weight sensors. The
OCM communicates with the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC). The ORC uses the occupant category to
determine whether the front passenger airbag should
be turned off. It also determines the rate of airbag
inflation during a collision.
•
Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between
the seat and the floor pan. The weight sensors measure
applied weight and transfers that information to the
OCM.
•
The Side Impact (SRS) Side Curtain Airbags (If
equipped) are designed to activate only in certain side
collisions.
The ORC module determines if a side collision is
severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate.
The side airbag control module will not detect roll
over, front or rear collisions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
2
The ORC Module monitors the readiness of the elec-
tronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON positions. These include all of
the items previously mentioned.
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The side curtain
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a
high force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where
the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies
to children.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
side curtain air bags, do not install a clothing bar
mounted to the coat hooks (or similarly mounted). A
clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the
bags.
•
When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
, it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of nontoxic gas
is generated to inflate the Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker inflates
rearward towards the driver’s knees to help protect
the knees and position you for the best interaction
with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds, this is
only about half of the time it takes you to blink your
eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to protect
the driver’s knees.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees, and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
The front passenger seat assembly contains critical com-
ponents that affect the front passenger airbag deploy-
ment. Correctly functioning front passenger seat compo-
nents are critical for the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) to properly classify the front passenger and calcu-
late the proper airbag deployment. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
assembly, or to the seat cover.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered to:
•
Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Do not modify the front seat center console or center
position seat in any way.
•
Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not
designated for the specific model being repaired. Al-
ways use the correct seat cover specified for the
vehicle.
•
Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat
cover.
•
Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar.
•
At no time should any supplemental restraint system
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fas-
tener be modified or replaced with any part except
those which are approved by DaimlerChrysler/
Mopar.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related compo-
nents, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci-
dent. A modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS).
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe col-
lision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and
then immediately deflate.
NOTE:
A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
2
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately. As the airbags deflate you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-
product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas
used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may
irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin
or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For
nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the
irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles
settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
•
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
belt retractor assembly, replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
Classification System serviced as well.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following func-
tions:
•
Cuts off fuel to the engine.
•
Flashes hazard lights.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Turns on the interior lamps which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlocks the doors automatically
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the airbag system is not
there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument
panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your advanced airbag system.
The airbag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any advanced airbag system service. If your seat including your
trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way (including
removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the
vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify an advanced
airbag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized
dealer.
• Do not place or hang any items such as add-on video players on the
right front passenger seat back. The additional weight may cause
the Occupant Classification System to be unable to correctly classify
the right front occupant. This could allow the passenger frontal
airbag to inflate when it is not desired.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a collision. Do not
mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee
bolsters/ driver inflatable knee blocker.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself.
Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an
airbag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
2
Airbag Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. While the airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
immediately.
•
The AIRBAG light does not come on during the 6 to 8
seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on.
•
The light remains on after the 6 to 8 second interval.
•
The light comes on and remains on while driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to 5 - seconds of specific vehicle data param-
eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
moment of airbag deployment, or near-deployment, and
up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data
during and/or after air bag deployment or near-
deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavail-
able.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler and others to learn more about
the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in
order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In
addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler, such investigations may be requested
by customers, insurance carriers, government officials,
and professional crash researchers, such as those associ-
ated with universities, and with hospital and insurance
organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler (regardless of initiative), the company
or its designated representative will first obtain permis-
sion of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the
electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data
by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a
warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the
custodial entity upon request. General data that does not
identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for
incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those
maintained by the US government and various states.
Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would
identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be
treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be dis-
closed by DaimlerChrysler to any third party except
when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a
DaimlerChrysler product
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
•
Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
•
Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
•
⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
•
Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
•
Impact acceleration and angle
•
Seatbelt status
•
Brake status (service and parking brakes)
•
Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
•
Engine control status (including engine speed)
•
Transmission gear selection
•
Cruise control status
•
Traction/stability control status
•
Tire pressure monitoring system status
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
2
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
Infants And Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs. (9 kg). Two
types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing:
infant carriers and ⬙convertible⬙ child seats. Both types
of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an-
chorage system.
•
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs. (9 kg). ⬙Convertible⬙ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs. (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs. (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs. (18 kg), but who are still too
small to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
NOTE:
For additional information refer to
www.seatcheck.org.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
2
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
switched to an automatic locking mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
belt tight, however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a
distinctive label. To operate the switchable retractor,
please refer to Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) in
this section.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into
the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is all removed
from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into the
retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions
of the child restraint manufacture.
NOTE:
To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat-
ing LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out-
board positions only. Regardless of the specific type of
lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible
child seats such that two seats share a common lower
anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
2
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the
outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat
belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child re-
straints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to,
Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installa-
tion instructions.
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
Rear Seat LATCH
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your child unattended in the vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seat back. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE:
If your child restraint seat is not LATCH
compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat
belts.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
2
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
2
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING!
If you are required to drive with the deck lid /
liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed,
and the climate control blower switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid, trans-
mission fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors
..............................69
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......69
▫ Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side .............69
▫ Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side ...........69
▫ Electric Remote-Control Mirrors ............70
▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .............71
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature ................71
䡵 Hands–Free Communication (UConnect™) —
If Equipped
...........................72
▫ Operations ...........................73
▫ Phone Call Features ....................79
▫ UConnect™ System Features ..............81
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity .............84
▫ Things You Should Know About
Your UConnect™ System .................86
▫ General Information ....................93
䡵 Seats
................................94
▫ Front Seat Adjustment ...................94
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment —
If Equipped ..........................95
▫ Manual Lumbar— If Equipped .............95
▫ Driver’s Seat Back Recline ................96
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints ...............96
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped ..............97
3
▫ Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat .............98
▫ Folding Rear Seat ......................99
▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped .........100
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood
............101
䡵 Lights
..............................102
▫ Map/Reading Lights ...................102
▫ Multi-Function Control Lever .............103
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights,
Instrument Panel Lights .................103
▫ Lights-On Reminder ...................104
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............104
▫ Turn Signals .........................105
▫ Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch .........105
▫ Passing Light ........................106
䡵 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped
..........................106
▫ Functionality ........................106
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers
..........106
▫ Windshield Washers ...................106
▫ Mist Feature .........................107
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation .............108
▫ Intermittent Wiper System ...............108
▫ Adding Washer Fluid ..................108
䡵 Tilt Steering Column
....................108
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
.....109
▫ ToActivate..........................110
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed ...............110
▫ To Deactivate ........................110
▫ To Resume Speed .....................110
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting ...............110
▫ Manual Transaxle .....................111
▫ To Accelerate For Passing ...............111
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
........112
▫ Programming The Universal Transceiver .....113
▫ “Rolling Code” Programming ............114
▫ Canadian Programming/
Gate Programming ....................116
▫ Operation ...........................116
▫ Reprogramming A Single Button ..........116
▫ Security ............................116
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) –
If Equipped
..........................117
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System -
ABS/TCS/BAS/ESP — If Equipped
........118
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) —
If Equipped .........................118
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) — If Equipped ....118
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) —
If Equipped .........................119
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped
............122
▫ Opening Sunroof – Manual ..............123
▫ Opening Sunroof – Express Mode ..........123
▫ Closing Sunroof – Manual ...............123
▫ Closing Sunroof – Express Mode ..........123
▫ Pinch Protect Feature ...................123
▫ Pinch Protect Override .................123
▫ Venting Sunroof – Express ...............124
▫ Sunshade Operation ...................124
▫ Wind Buffeting .......................124
▫ Sunroof Maintenance ...................124
▫ Ignition Off Operation ..................124
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets
.................124
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off .......126
䡵 Console Features
......................127
䡵 Cargo Area Features
....................128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67
3
▫ Cargo Light/Removable Self- Recharging
Flashlight – If Equipped ................128
▫ Tonneau Cover — If Equipped ............130
▫ Removable Load Floor ..................130
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Loops .................130
▫ Fold Down Speakers – If Equipped .........132
䡵 Rear Window Features
..................132
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer .............132
▫ Rear Window Defroster .................134
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped
.........134
䡵 Cooled Beverage Storage Bin/Glove
Compartment — If Equipped
.............134
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side
Adjust the Flat (Drivers Side) Outside Mirror so you can
just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror
closest to vehicle with your head close to the door glass.
Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69
3
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Remote Control Mirrors Switch
Mirror Directions
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward.
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
3
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- vehicle
communications system. UConnect™ allows you to dial
a phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is trans-
mitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect™ system.
NOTE:
The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversation.
The UConnect™ phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names and four numbers per name. Each language has a
separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Blue-
tooth™ Hands-Free profile cellular phone. UConnect™
features Bluetooth™ technology - the global standard
that enables different electronic devices to connect to
each other without wires or a docking station, so UCon-
nect works no matter where you stow your cellular
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as
your phone is turned on and has been paired to the
vehicle’s UConnect™ system. The UConnect™ system
allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to system.
Only one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system.
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands-
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. See
www.chrysler.com/uconnect for supported phones. If
your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g.,
Headset Profile), you may not be able to use any UCon-
nect™ features. Refer to your cellular service provider or
the phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated with the
vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect™
system can be adjusted either from the radio volume
control knob, or from the steering wheel radio control
(right switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operations
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect™
system and to navigate through the UConnect™ menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect™ system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the voice on beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt
or another prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
UConnect™ Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
3
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command, when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice com-
mand ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect™ system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to some one
sitting eight feet away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” at the end of this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the voice on beep. The UConnect™ system will play all
the options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the UConnect™ system from idle, simply
press the ’Phone’ button and follow audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect™ system sessions begin with a
press of the ’Phone’ button on the mirror.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the voice on beep, you can say
⬙Cancel⬙ and you will be returned to the main menu.
However, in a few instances the system will take you
back to the previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect™ System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone.
NOTE:
The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
version 0.96 or higher. See www.chrysler.com/uconnect
for supported phones.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual. One of the
following vehicle specific websites may also provide
detailed instructions for pairing with the brand of phone
that you have:
NOTE:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
The following are general phone to UConnect™ System
pairing instructions:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
•
When prompted, after the voice on beep, say ⬙Pair a
Phone⬙ and follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number,
which you will later need to enter into your cellular.
You can enter any four-digit pin number. You will not
need to remember this pin number after the initial
pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect™ system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect™ System. The priority allows the
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙).
Call/Dial by Saying a Number
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
•
System will prompt you to say the number you want
call.
•
For example, you can say “234-567-8901.” The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the Country in which the
vehicle was purchased, the UConnect™ limits the user
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
3
from dialing invalid combination of numbers. For
example, in USA, 234-567-890 is nine digits long,
which is not a valid USA phone number - the closest
valid phone number has ten digits.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the phone num-
ber and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
Call/Dial by Saying a Name
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial” or Call.⬙
•
System will prompt you to say the name of the person
you want call.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the UConnect™ phone-
book. Refer to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect™
Phonebook,⬙ to learn how to store a name in the
phonebook.
•
The UConnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE:
Adding names to phonebook is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and is recom-
mended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or ⬙Robert⬙
instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙⬙Work,⬙⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE:
Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
NOTE:
Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
3
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the ⬙Voice Recognition⬙ button
while the UConnect™ system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete, home,
work, mobile, or pager. Say the designation you wish
to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be de-
leted. Note that only the phonebook in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the ⬙Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name, and then say ⬙Call.⬙ NOTE: the user can also
exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ operations at this point.
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the vehicle audio
system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. To reject the call, press and hold the ’Phone’ button
until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming
call was rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the ’Phone’ button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
The UConnect™ system compatible phones in
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only either answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls.⬙ To combine two calls, refer
to ⬙Conference Call.⬙
Place/Retrieve a Call from Hold
To put a call on hold, press the ⬘Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
⬘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
3
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call as described under ⬙Making a Second Call
while Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call has
established, press and hold the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the ⬘Phone’
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the ‘Phone’ button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. Note: this may not
be the last number dialed from the UConnect™ sys-
tem.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is progression of a phone call on
UConnect™ system after the vehicle ignition key has
been switched to off. Call continuation functionality
available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After ignition key is switched off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system either until the call ends or
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of
the call on the UConnect™ system and transfer of the
call to the mobile phone.
•
After ignition key is switched to off, a call can continue
on the UConnect™ system for certain duration, after
which the call is automatically transferred from the
UConnect™ system to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after ignition key is switched to off.
UConnect™ System Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE:
After every UConnect™ language change op-
eration, only the language specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language specific
and usable across all languages.
For command translations and alternate commands in
supported languages, refer to “Command Translations”
at the end of this section.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect™ system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
3
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is only supported in the USA.
NOTE:
The emergency number dialed is based on the
Country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for USA and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available cellular service and area.
The UConnect™ system does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the cell phone directly.
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect™ system to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect™
system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance,
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the Country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-
528-2069 for USA, 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico city and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
city in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” cover-
age details in the Warranty information booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies which time-out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect™ system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is designed to be used in instances where
one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone
keypad while navigating through an automated tele-
phone system.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice-
mail system or an automated service, such as, paging
service or automated customer service. Some services
require immediate response selection, in some instances,
that may be too quick for use of UConnect™ system.
When calling a number with your UConnect™ system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can push
the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say the sequence you
wish to enter followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your pin number followed with a
pound3746#,youcanpressthe’VoiceRecognition’
button and say ⬙3746#Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send⬙ is also to be
used to navigate through an automated customer service
center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect™
system will not repeat a phone number before you dial
it).
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect™ system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect™ system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect™. The status is given for roaming net-
work signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
3
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system (while
dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect™ system will work the
same as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE:
Certain brands of mobile phones do not send
the dial ring to the UConnect™ system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number, the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-mute (Mute off)
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect™ system:
•
Press the ’Voice Recognition’ button.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Mute-off.⬙
Information Service
When using AT&T Wireless Service, dialing to phone
number ⬙#121,⬙ you can access voice activated automated
system to receive news, weather, stocks, traffic, etc.
related information.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows on going calls to be
transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your UConnect™ paired cellular phone to
the UConnect™ system or vice-versa, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect™ System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a UConnect™ paired cellular
phone and the UConnect™ system, then follow the
instruction described in your cellular phone user’s
manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone pairing”.
•
When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
•
The UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the ⬘Voice recognition’
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “de-
lete” a paired phone.
Select another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone with the UConnect™ system. The phone must
have been previously paired to the UConnect™ system
that you want to use it with.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played, and then choose
the phone that you wish to select.
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the UCon-
nect™ system will return to using the highest priority
phone present in or near (approximately with in 30
feet) the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
3
Delete UConnect™ Paired Cellular Phones
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
•
At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the ⬘Voice Recognition’ button
anytime while the list is being played and then choose
the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect™
System
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two procedures: From
outside the UConnect mode (e.g. from radio mode),
•
Press and hold the ‘Voice Recognition’ button for 5
seconds until the session begins, or
•
Press the ‘Voice Recognition’ button and say ⬙Setup,
Voice Training⬙ command.
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the Voice recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting approximately eight (8) feet
away from you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may
be compromised with roof top down.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system, such
as voice mail, or when sending a page at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙send.⬙
•
Storing names in phonebook when vehicle is not in
motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect™ phonebook.
•
UConnect™ phonebook nametag recognition rate is
optimized for the voice of the person who stored the
name in the phonebook.
•
You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
•
fully closed windows, and
•
dry weather condition.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
3
•
Operation from driver seat.
•
In a convertible vehicle, the system performance may
be compromised with roof top down.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect™ system.
•
Echo at far end can sometime be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Bluetooth Communication Link
Occasionally, Cellular phones have been found to lose
connection to the UConnect™ system. When this hap-
pens, the connection can generally be re-established by
switching the phone off/on. Your cell phone is recom-
mended to remain in Bluetooth ⬙on⬙ mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a reset, you must wait at least
five (5) seconds prior to using the system.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
3
North American English
Primary Alternate(s)
Zero
One
Two
Three
Four
Five
Six
Seven
Eight
Nine
Star (*)
Plus (+)
Pound (#)
Add Location
All
Call
Cancel
Confirmation Prompts
Continue
Delete
Dial
Edit
Emergency
English
Erase All
Espanol
Francais
Help
Home
Language
List names
List phones
Mobile
Mute
Mute off
New entry
No
Pager
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pair a phone
Phone pairing Pairing
Phonebook Phone book
Previous
Record again
Redial
Return to main menu Return. Main menu
Select phone Select
Send
Set up Phone settings / Phone
set up
Towing assistance
Transfer call
Try again
Voice training
Work
Yes
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
3
SEATS
Front Seat Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position.
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be properly adjusted and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Front Seat Adjustment
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the ratcheting handle on the outboard side of the seat to
adjust the driving position.
Manual Lumbar— If Equipped
The Lumbar adjustment is located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat. To increase or decrease support,
rotate the handle up or down.
Seat Height Adjustment Lumbar Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
3
Driver’s Seat Back Recline
To recline:
1. Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back
to the desired position and release the handle.
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright
position.
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the button
and push down on the head restraint.
Reclining Seat Head Restraint Adjustment
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat.
This feature heats the front driver’s and passenger’s
seats. The controls for the heater is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio. After turning on the
ignition, you may choose OFF, HIGH, or LOW heat
settings. An indicator on the switch shows which setting
has been chosen.
Pressing the switch once will select high-level heating.
Pressing the switch a second time will select low-level
heating. Pressing the switch a third time will shut the
heating elements off.
Heated Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
3
When high-temperature heating is selected, the heaters
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation after heating is activated. The heat output
then drops to the normal high-temperature level. If
high-level heating is selected, the system will automati-
cally switch to the low level after about 30 minutes of
continuous operation. At that time, the number of illu-
minated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the
change. Operation on the low setting also turns off
automatically after about 30 minutes.
NOTE:
If the high heat setting is selected, heat will be
felt within 2 to 3 minutes.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat
To fold the front passenger seat, lift the recliner handle to
full up position and push the seatback forward until it
rests on the cushion in the fold flat position.
Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Control
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to move the
seat forward and flat.
Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat
Folding Rear Seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
3
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just
enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the
seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees
maximum, and release the strap.
Rear Seat Folded Flat
Reclining The Rear Seat
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts
•
Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located on the left kick panel.
Primary Hood Latch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
3
Then move the safety catch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the left side (right side
facing hood) of the engine compartment, to secure the
hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the
location stamped into the inner hood surface.
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20
cm (8 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rear view mirror. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light OFF. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
Secondary Hood Latch Location
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
Multi-Function Control Lever
The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation.
Map/Reading Lights
Headlight Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
3
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control
Lever up or down.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the control lever.
NOTE:
The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Dimmer Control
Fog Light Control
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the Multi-Function Control Lever away from you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Push the Lever
away from you again, to switch the headlights back to
Low beam.
Turn Signal Control
High Beam Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
NOTE:
If the Multi-Function Control Lever is held in
the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds, the
high beams will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds
for the next flash to pass operation.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
Functionality
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity (lower), whenever the
ignition is on, the engine is running, the headlight switch
is off, the parking brake is off, the turn signal is off, and
the gear shift is in any position except park.
NOTE:
On this vehicle, the daytime running light will
automatically turn off when the turn signals or hazard
warning flashers are in operation and automatically turn
back on when the turn signals or hazard warning flashers
are not operating.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is
left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
Washer Control Mist Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
3
Windshield Wiper Operation
Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper
speed.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the knob upward
(clockwise) to decrease the delay time and downward
(counterclockwise) to increase the delay time. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18
seconds between cycles, to a cycle every second.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (If Equipped) is shared. It is located
in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol-
vent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the steering column, push down on the lever below
the turn signal control lever. With one hand firmly on the
wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired.
Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place.
Wiper Control
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The
speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
Tilt Steering Control
Speed Control Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
3
To Activate:
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set At A Desired Speed:
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Deactivate:
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
lever towards you “CANCEL”, or normal brake or clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed
control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing
the ON/OFF button or turning off the ignition switch
erases the set speed memory.
To Resume Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push the “RESUME
ACCEL” lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting:
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
pushing up and holding “RESUME ACCEL”. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new
speed will be set.
Tapping “RESUME ACCEL” once will result ina1mph
(2 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 3 mph (5 km/h), etc.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down
and hold “SET DECEL”. Release the lever when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the “SET DECEL” button once will result in a 1
mph (2 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
Manual Transaxle:
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed
control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed
loss.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
NOTE:
The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
3
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
The HomeLink威 system will be disabled if the
Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped) is in the Armed or
Alarming state. The HomeLink威 system will only operate
when the Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped) is in the
Disarmed mode.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
The three buttons for your garage door opener will be
located in the the headliner, several inches rearward of
the rearview mirror. The training procedure is the same
regardless of the 3-button location.
For additional information on HomeLink威, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
HomeLink Buttons
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
Programming The Universal Transceiver
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held
transmitter before programming. If your garage door
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight
down.
1. Turn off the engine.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
NOTE:
Step 2 does not have to be followed to program
additional hand held transmitters.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
3
3. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons
to program. Place the hand held controller one to three
inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its
indicator light in view.
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter
button and the desired Universal Transceiver button. Do
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed.
NOTE:
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed
under Canadian Programming.
5. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid
flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90
seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the
Universal Transceiver.
NOTE:
If you do not successfully program the
Universal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand
held transmitter, refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or
call toll free for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515,
or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
“Rolling Code” Programming
NOTE:
If your hand held transmitter appears to pro-
gram the Universal Transceiver, but your garage door or
other device does not operate, and your device was
manufactured after 1996, your garage door opener or
other device may have a “Rolling Code” system.
Proper Transceiver Training Distance
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the
copying of your code.
To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code”
system:
•
Check the owner’s manual for the device for mention
of “Rolling Codes”.
•
Press and hold the programmed button on the Univer-
sal Transceiver. If the Universal Transceiver indicator
light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds,
the device has the “Rolling Code” feature.
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing the Programming
portion of this text:
NOTE:
The assistance of a second person may make the
following programming procedure quicker and easier.
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have
difficulty in locating the training button, check your
garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on
the Internet, at www.homelink.com.
2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.
NOTE:
After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to
start step 3.
3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and
firmly press and release the garage door button. Press
and release the button a second time to complete the
training process. Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to complete the
training.
Your garage door opener should now recognize your
Universal Transceiver. The remaining two buttons may
now be programmed if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the Programming instructions. You may
use either your Universal Transceiver or your original
hand-held transmitter to open you garage door.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
3
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand
held transmitter button every two seconds during pro-
gramming.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver
button while you press and release the hand held trans-
mitter button until the frequency signal has been learned.
The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and
then rapidly when the programming is successful.
NOTE:
When programming such a garage door opener
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to
the garage door or gate motor.
Operation
Press and hold the desired button on the Universal
Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins
to operate. The light in the display shows that the signal
is being transmitted. The hand held transmitter may also
be used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single Button
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been
completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after
20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter one to
three inches away from the button to be trained.
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to
flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights
begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash.
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink威 is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) – IF
EQUIPPED
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
NOTE:
ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
WARNING!
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
3
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM -
ABS/TCS/BAS/ESP — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with the advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS) Brake Assist
System (BAS), and Electronic Stability Program (ESP). All
four systems work together to enhance vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions, and are com-
monly referred to as ESP.
Traction Control System (TCS) — IF Equipped
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
Brake Assist System (BAS) — IF Equipped
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous brak-
ing pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
•
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESP (Electronic Stability Program) — IF Equipped
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP cor-
rects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying
the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter-
acting the over/under steer condition. Engine power
may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path. ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it
to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake
of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
3
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions.
•
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
ESP Operating Modes
The ESP system has 2 available operating modes.
ESP ON
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial ESP”
for specific reasons as noted below.
PARTIAL ESP
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the
“ESP OFF” button.
When in “Partial ESP” mode, the TCS portion of ESP has
been disabled, the thresholds for ESP activation are
raised, and the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will be illu-
minated. This mode is intended to be used for a more
spirited driving experience, or if the vehicle is in deep
snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin
that ESP would normally allow is required.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the
“ESP OFF” button.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In the Partial ESP mode, the engine torque reduction
and stability features are desensitized. Therefore,
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
NOTE:
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial ESP”
mode by pressing the “ESP OFF” button. Once the
situation requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial
ESP” mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momen-
tarily depressing the “ESP OFF” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP/TCS Indicator
Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should both
go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warn-
ing Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in either the
ESP or BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•
The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
3
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
•
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OPENING SUNROOF – MANUAL
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
OPENING SUNROOF – EXPRESS MODE
By pressing the switch rearward and releasing, the sun-
roof will fully open from any position and stop at the end
of travel automatically. This is called Express Open.
During Express Open, any activation of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
CLOSING SUNROOF – MANUAL
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Again, any release of the switch will
stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partial close condition until the switch is pushed and
held forward again. To ensure sunroof is fully closed,
press and hold switch until sunroof has completely
stopped moving.
CLOSING SUNROOF – EXPRESS MODE
By pressing the switch forward and releasing, the sunroof
will fully close from any position and stop at the end of
travel automatically. This is called Express Close. During
Express Close, any activation of the sunroof switch will
stop the sunroof.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Next, press the switch
forward and release to Express Close.
PINCH PROTECT OVERRIDE
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the close position.
NOTE:
Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
3
VENTING SUNROOF – EXPRESS
Press and hold the “V” button, and the sunroof will open
to the vent position. This is called Express Vent, and will
occur regardless of the sunroof position. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch will stop the
sunroof.
SUNSHADE OPERATION
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
IGNITION OFF OPERATION
The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the
ignition has been turned off. The sunroof operation will
be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during
the accessory delay time or set accessory delay time.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12-Volt power outlet in the instru-
ment panel and a 115 Volt (150-Watts Maximum) outlet in
the center console on SXT and R/T models for added
convenience. These outlets can power cell phones, elec-
tronics and other low power devices.
NOTE:
Due to overload protection the inverter will
shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To Avoid Serious Injury or Death:
•
Donotusea3-Prong Adaptor.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use, and while driving
the vehicle
•
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Power Outlet 12 Volts
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
3
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
•
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.); will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Power Outlet 115 Volts (150 Watt)
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONSOLE FEATURES
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with the console com-
partment lid in the open position. Cell phones,
music players, and other hand held electronic de-
vices should be stowed while driving. Use of these
devices while driving can cause an accident due to
distraction, resulting in death or injury.
The floor console’s sliding armrest moves forward 3
inches to accommodate shorter drivers. The armrest lid
also includes a unique flip pocket for holding or stowing
a phone or an MP3 player. The bin inside the console can
hold up to 10 CD jewel cases or other items securely out
of sight.
A 115 - volt outlet to power small electronics is on the
console and is standard on all models except the SE
model. For more information on this outlet refer to the
section “Electrical Power Outlets” in this book.
NOTE:
The flip pocket and console lid features are
intended to be used in the upright or open position only
while the vehicle is parked. While driving, all handheld
devices should be properly stowed, and the flip pocket
and the console lid should be closed.
Floor Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
3
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light/Removable Self- Recharging
Flashlight – If Equipped
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries when snapped back into place for convenience.
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
Press and Release
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Removing Flashlight Three Press Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
Tonneau cover — If Equipped
The cargo area trim panels include two notches for
mounting the available tonneau cover that accommo-
dates the reclining rear seat.
WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle
could cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden
stop and strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store
the cargo cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger
compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle
when taken from its mounting. Do not store in the
vehicle.
Removable Load Floor
The cargo area load floor is removable and can be
washed with mild soap and water.
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
There are two d-rings installed on the d pillars for
securing a net across the liftgate opening.
Rear Cargo Area
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Cargo tie-down Loops are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion a loop could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
•
The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and
vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control result-
ing in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
•
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
•
Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
•
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
3
Fold Down Speakers – If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down
of the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and
other activities.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the ON position will
activate the wiper. The rear wiper operates in an inter-
mittent mode only. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
Fold Down Speakers
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power acces-
sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to park.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer (If Equipped) is shared. It is located
in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger
side and should be checked for fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer sol-
vent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
Rear Washer Wiper Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
3
Rear Window Defroster
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear win-
dow to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a
soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
parallel to the heating elements. Also, keep all
objects a safe distance from the window to prevent
damaging the heating elements.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
An optional dealer installed-roof rack with cross rails is
available through MOPAR for added cargo versatility.
COOLED BEVERAGE STORAGE BIN/GLOVE
COMPARTMENT — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
The use of the Cooled Beverage Storage Bin is
for non-perishable beverages only.
The upper storage bin door swings up to present the
contents of the long, shallow bin that can store items out
of sight. Beneath this bin is the glove compartment. The
large glove compartment door swings down on damp-
ened hinges and features two levels of storage: the upper
bin functions as a Cooled Beverage Storage Bin for
vehicles equipped with air conditioning for storing up to
four 20 ounce (0.6 Liter). bottles or cans. When desired,
cool air enters the compartment to keep the contents cool,
depending on ambient temperature and A/C settings.
Rear Wiper And Defroster Grid
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the beverage cooler, pull the slide control
about 1/2 inch (12 mm) toward the passenger compart-
ment. This will allow cool air to enter the beverage cooler.
To shut off the beverage cooler when not in use, push the
slide control back 1/2 inch (12 mm). This will prevent
cool air from entering the passenger compartment when
in heat mode.
Glove compartment and Cooled Beverage Storage
Positioning Slide Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3
Vehicles without air conditioning can use that space for
storage. The lower bin holds the owner’s manual and
other important documents. Another storage bin is lo-
cated on the outboard side of the steering wheel can hold
small items like parking cards for easy access.
Slide Control Movement
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features
...............141
䡵 Instrument Cluster—Base
................142
䡵 Instrument Cluster—Premium
............143
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions
...........144
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) – If Equipped
...................152
▫ EVIC Functions .......................154
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio ............154
▫ Average Fuel Economy .................155
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) ...............155
▫ Elapsed Time ........................155
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) .............155
▫ Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) ........155
䡵 Setting The Compass Variance And
Compass Calibration
...................158
▫ Compass Variance .....................158
▫ Compass Calibration ...................160
䡵 Radio General Information
...............160
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals .................160
▫ Two Types Of Signals ..................161
▫ Electrical Disturbances ..................161
▫ AM Reception .......................161
▫ FM Reception ........................161
4
䡵 Electronic Digital Clock
.................161
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................162
䡵 Sales Code REF — AM/FM/CD
(Single Disc) Radio With Optional Satellite
Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability
....162
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......163
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode .........166
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .....167
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone —
If Equipped .........................168
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio —
If Equipped .........................168
䡵 Sales Code RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-Disc)
Radio With Optional Satellite Radio, Hands
Free Phone, And Vehicle
Entertainment Systems (VES) Capabilities
....169
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......169
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........173
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........174
▫ NotesOnPlayingMP3Files .............176
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play) ..........178
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...............178
䡵 Sales Code RAK – AM/FM/Cassette/CD
(6-Disc) Radio With Optional Satellite Radio,
Hands Free Phone, Video, MP3, And
WMA Capabilities
.....................180
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode .......180
▫ Operating Instructions — Tape Player .......184
▫ Seek Button .........................184
▫ Fast Forward (FF) .....................184
▫ Rewind (RW) ........................184
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ TapeEject...........................184
▫ Scan Button .........................185
▫ Changing Tape Direction ................185
▫ Metal Tape Selection ...................185
▫ Pinch Roller Release ...................185
▫ Noise Reduction ......................185
▫ Operation Instructions -
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........185
▫ Load/Eject Button
(CD Mode For CD Audio Play) ...........186
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............188
▫ Operation Instructions - (CD Mode For MP3
And WMA Audio Play) .................190
▫ Load/Eject Button (CD Mode For MP3
AndWMAPlay)......................190
䡵 Sales Code REC — AM/FM/CD
(6–Disc) Radio With Navigation System
.....192
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
(If Equipped) ........................192
▫ Clock Setting Procedure.................192
䡵 Satellite Radio — If Equipped
.............193
▫ System Activation .....................193
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) ..........193
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode In REF,
And RAQ, Radios .....................194
▫ Selecting a Channel ....................194
▫ Storing And Selecting Pre-Set Channels ......195
▫ Using The PTY (Program Type) Button
(If Equipped) ........................195
▫ PTY Button ⬙Scan⬙ .....................195
▫ PTY Button ⬙Seek⬙ .....................195
▫ Satellite Antenna ......................195
▫ Reception Quality .....................195
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
4
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped
..........................196
▫ Radio Operation ......................196
▫ CD Player ..........................197
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance
..............197
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones
.......198
䡵 Climate Controls
......................198
▫ Climate Controls ......................198
▫ Air Filtration System – If Equipped ........202
▫ Operating Tips .......................203
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—BASE
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER—PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining
in the fuel tank.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
located on the left side of the vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading below the red area of
the gauge shows that the engine cooling system
is operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a
higher than normal temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go
traffic, or when towing a trailer.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
4. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
5. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to 2 gallons, the fuel
symbol will light and a single chime will sound.
7. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical
charging system. The light should come on
briefly when the ignition switch is first turned ON and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on
or comes on while driving, it means that there is a
problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE
IMMEDIATELY.
8. Airbag Light
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light does
not come on during starting, stays on, or
comes on while driving, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
9. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
slowly indicating that the system is armed.
10. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will come on for about six seconds. A
chime will sound if you have not pulled the
shoulder belt out of the retractor. This is a reminder to
“buckle up”. If you do not buckle up, the light will
remain on.
11. Oil Pressure Light
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will
come on and remain on when the ignition
switch is turned from the OFF to the ON position, and
the light will turn off after the engine is started. If the
bulb does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
4
12. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine con-
dition. If the engine is critically hot, a warning
chime will sound 10 times. After the chime
turns off, the engine will still be critically hot until the
light goes out. Refer to “Temperature Gauge’ later in
this section for steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition.
13. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
14. Tire Pressure Monitor Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires are significantly under-inflated. Ac-
cordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more tire pressures is low. The
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will flash on and
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
off for 60 seconds when a system fault is detected. The
flash cycle will repeat every ten minutes or until the fault
condition is removed and reset.
If this indicator comes on, the entire PRNDL/odometer
display will brighten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY
and will not be dimmable.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer
A vacuum fluorescent display indicates the total distance
the vehicle has been driven. Also, the cluster will display,
replacing the odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning
messages such as: door/gate ajar and loose gas cap.
Loose gas cap will be displayed from the Odometer/Trip
Odometer on all models.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with the optional Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instru-
ment cluster, all warnings including “door”, and “gATE”
will only be displayed in the EVIC display. For additional
information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter — If Equipped” in Section 3.
U.S. federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading is changed during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so that the correct mileage can
be determined.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
4
16. Malfunction Indicator Light
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic
system called OBD that monitors emissions,
engine, and automatic transmission control
systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs.
If this indicator comes on, the entire PRNDL/odometer
display will brighten to FULL DAYTIME INTENSITY
and will not be dimmable.
17. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON.
18. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip
mode to reset.
19. Electronic Throttle Control Indicator Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control system. If a prob-
lem is detected, the light will come on while
the engine is running. If the light remains lit
with the engine running your vehicle will usually be
drivable and not need towing, however see your
dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running you
may experience power loss, an elevated/rough idle, and
increased brake pedal effort, and your vehicle may
require towing. Immediate service is required.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The light will come on when the ignition switch is first
turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check. This is
normal. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
20. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt
your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions, and do not switch off the ESP, or TCS
— if equipped.
21. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
22. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are
ON.
23. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light
The malfunction lamp for the ESP is com-
bined with BAS. The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They
should go out with the engine running. If the “ESP/
BAS Warning Lamp” comes on continuously with the
engine running, a malfunction has been detected in
either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light remains
on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has
been driven several miles at speeds greater than 30
mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
24. All-Wheel-Drive Failure Indicator Light
This light monitors the All-Wheel-Drive
(AWD) system. The light will come on, for a
bulb check, when the ignition key is turned
to the ON position and may stay on for as
long as 3 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
4
When lit solid: There is an AWD system fault. AWD
performance will be at a reduced level. Service the AWD
system soon.
When blinking: The AWD system is temporarily dis-
abled due to overload condition.
25. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS) described elsewhere in this
manual. This light will come on when the
ignition key is turned to the ON position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should
come on. If the light does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
26. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Push the turn signal lever away from the
steering wheel to switch the headlights from high or
low beam.
27. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate
that the parking brake is applied, there is a low brake
fluid level or there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with Anti-Lock brakes (ABS), are also
equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD).
In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light
will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair
to the ABS system is required.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to
the ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi-
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
28. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Button—If Equipped
Pushing this button will switch between the different
EVIC functions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
4
29. Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Display—If Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
30. Transmission Over Temp Light
During sustained high speed driving on hot
days, the automatic transaxle oil may be-
come too hot. If this happens, the transmis-
sion overheat indicator light will come on
and the vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic
transaxle cools down enough to allow a return to the
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion.
31. Rear Fog Light Indicator
This light shows the rear fog lights are ON.
32. Glow Plug Light — Diesel Engine Only
The glow plug light will illuminate when the
ignition key is first turned to the ON position.
Wait until the glow plug light turns OFF then start the
vehicle.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – If Equipped
EVIC Location
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display. It is located in the lower
left part of the cluster below the fuel and engine tem-
perature gauge. The EVIC consists of the following:
•
System Status
•
Vehicle information warning message displays
•
Personal Settings (customer programmable features)
•
Compass heading
•
Outside temperature display
•
Trip computer functions
•
UConnect™ hands-free communication system dis-
plays — If Equipped
•
Audio mode display
•
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays the following
messages.
•
Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime)
•
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•
Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
•
Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
•
RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
•
Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
(automatic transmissions) or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmissions).
•
Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph)
•
Door (S) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
•
Gate Ajar (with a single chime)
•
Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
4
•
Headlamps On
•
Key In Ignition
•
Check TPM System
EVIC Functions
Press the EVIC button until one of the following func-
tions are displayed on the EVIC:
•
Compass/Temperature/Audio
•
Average Fuel Economy
•
Distance To Empty (DTE)
•
Elapsed Time
•
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
•
Personal Settings
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur
if a resettable function is currently being displayed. To
reset all resettable functions, press and release the EVIC
button a second time within 3 seconds of resetting the
currently displayed function (Reset ALL will be dis-
played during this 3 second window).
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature and the current radio
station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)
in this section.
EVIC Button
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 kilometers)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL⬙. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will be dis-
played, based on the current values in the DTE calcula-
tion and the current fuel tank level.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to Section 5, “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) for system operation.
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmissions).
Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Settings
is displayed in the EVIC.
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
4
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais depend-
ing on availability. As you continue the displayed infor-
mation will be shown in the selected language.
NOTE:
UConnect™ language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in the
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) — IF
EQUIPPED section of this manual for details.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)
When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmissions) or the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position
(automatic transmissions). Press and hold the EVIC but-
ton when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driv-
er’s door will unlock on the first press of the remote
keyless entry unlock button and require a second press to
unlock the remaining locked doors. When REMOTE
UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected all of the doors will
unlock at the first press of the remote keyless entry
unlock button. Press and hold the EVIC button when in
this display until “DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST” or “ALL
DOORS” appears to make your selection.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when
the remote keyless entry “Lock” button is pressed. This
feature may be selected with or without the flash lights
on lock/unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. Press and hold the EVIC button when in this
display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your
selection.
Delay Turning Headlamps Off
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to
have the headlamps remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
Headlamps On With Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the
AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. Press and hold
the EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
NOTE:
Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in this section.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands–free system, power sunroof, and
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a
vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “Off”, “45 sec.”,
“5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make your selection.
Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected the headlamps will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“OFF”, “30 sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make
your selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
4
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected all voice commands from the
U-Connect system are confirmed. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF”
appears to make your selection.
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system units can be
changed between English and Metric.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“US” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection.
Setting The Compass Variance And Compass
Calibration
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and Geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. In order to ensure compass accuracy, the com-
pass variance should be set to the zone number on the
compass variance map that corresponds to the current
location of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the Instrument Panel. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the variance: with the ignition in the ON position,
with a short button press (less than one second) press and
release the EVIC button several times until you have
displayed the Personal Settings (Customer Program-
mable Features) menu. Once in the Personal Settings
(Customer Programmable Features) menu, press and
release (less than one second) the EVIC button several
times until “Compass Variance” is highlighted. The
“Compass Variance” message and the current variance
zone number will be displayed. To change the zone, press
and hold (longer than two seconds) the EVIC button to
increment the variance one step. Repeat as necessary,
with individual long (for at least 1 second) EVIC button
presses for each increment, until the desired variance is
achieved. To exit the Variance Programming, press the
EVIC button with a short (less than one second) button
press.
NOTE:
The factory default Zone is 8. During program-
ming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
Zone 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
4
Compass Calibration
The Compass will automatically calibrate if the Cal
indicator is flashing, by driving around slowly (under 5
mph / 8 km/h) in one or more complete circles in an area
free from large metallic objects or power lines, until the
Cal indicator turns off. If during normal use the compass
appears erratic, inaccurate or abnormal, you may wish to
manually calibrate the compass. Prior to calibrating the
compass make sure the proper zone is selected.
To manually calibrate the Compass: start the engine and
leave the transmission in the PARK position. Using a
short button press (less than one second), press and
release the EVIC button several times until the EVIC
displays the Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) menu. Once in the Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features) menu, press and release (less
than one second) the EVIC button several times until
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed. Using a long
button press (more than one second), pressing the EVIC
button will place the Compass in calibration mode. The
Cal indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC
display to indicate that the compass is now in the
calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven
to calibrate. (A short EVIC button press from the ⬙Cali-
brate Compass (Yes)⬙ screen will exit the EVIC Customer
Programmable features, and return it to its normal oper-
ating mode). To complete the compass calibration, drive
the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles
under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from power lines,
large metallic objects, until the CAL indicator turns off.
The compass will now function normally.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
NOTE:
The radio, steering wheel radio controls (if
equipped), and 6 disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped)
will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the frequency and/or
time in hours and minutes (depending on your radio
model) whenever the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position, or
when the radio frequency is being displayed, time keep-
ing is accurately maintained.
On the AM/FM/CD (6-disc) radio the time button alter-
nates the location of the time and frequency on the
display. On the AM/FM/CD (single-disc) radio only one
of the two, time or frequency is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
4
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait approximately
5 seconds.
SALES CODE REF — AM/FM/CD (SINGLE DISC)
RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND
HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY
NOTE:
The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
REF Radio
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control, turning the radio ON/OFF,
or turning ON/OFF the ignition, will cancel the MUTE
feature.
NOTE:
In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in either, AM, FM, or Satellite
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
4
(if equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
PSCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan
through preset stations in either, AM, FM, or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
preset station before continuing to the next. To stop the
search, press PSCAN a second time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the tune control again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
RND/SET Button (Radio Mode) To SET The
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be stored
into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Preset Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
4
Operation Instructions - CD Mode
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Inserting The Compact Disc (Single CD Player)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch to CD
mode and begin to play. The display will show the track
number and play time in minutes and seconds. Play will
begin at the start of track one.
NOTE:
•
On some vehicles, you may insert or eject a disc with
the radio or ignition switch OFF.
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
•
This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks.
SEEK Button (CD Mode)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track
on the CD. Press the left side of the button to return to the
beginning of the current track, or return to the beginning
of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10
seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
EJECT Button (CD Mode)
Press this button and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. The
unit will switch to the last selected mode.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (CD Mode)
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player
will begin to fast forward until FF is released. The RW
(Reverse) button works in a similar manner.
RND/SET Button (Random Play Button) (CD
Mode)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize
the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source and play
through the vehicle speakers.
The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical
device is plugged into the AUX jack using a standard 3.5
mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases
the MODE button until AUX appears on the display.
NOTE:
The radio will return to the last stored mode if
the ignition switch is turned from the OFF/LOCK posi-
tion to the ACC position, the radio is turned on, and the
radio was previously in the AUX mode.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
4
MUTE Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will display. Press the MUTE button a
second time and the sound from the speakers will return.
Rotating the volume control or turning OFF the ignition
will also return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
PSCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display from elapsed
playing time to time of day. The time of day will display
for 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
RND/SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Mode Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player and Satellite Radio (if equipped).
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone — If
Equipped
Refer to the “HANDS FREE PHONE (UConnect™)”
section of the Owner’s Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio — If
Equipped
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RAQ – AM/FM/CD (6-DISC) RADIO
WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO, HANDS
FREE PHONE, AND VEHICLE ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEMS (VES) CAPABILITIES
NOTE:
The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Satellite Radio, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
RAQ Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
4
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
listenable station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if
equipped) mode. Press the right side of the button to seek
up and the left side to seek down. The radio will remain
tuned to the new station until you make another selec-
tion. Holding the button will bypass stations without
stopping until you release it.
MUTE Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers
NOTE:
In Hands Free Phone (if equipped) mode, the
MUTE button mutes the microphone.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
MSG or INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station (one
with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio
Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode
only).
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will be
displayed for 5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune /
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side Tune
/ Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune / Audio
control.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or
counter-clockwise to decrease the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL-
ANCE will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or
left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side
speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button or
turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will
allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio
stations do not currently broadcast PTY information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
4
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Alert Alert Alert Alert
Classical Classical
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
College College
Country Country
Emergency Test Emergency Test
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Information Information
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Oldies Oldies
Personality Personality
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Religious Music Religious_Music
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top_40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/DIR Button (Radio Mode) — To Set the
Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET/DIR
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET/DIR
button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into push-button memory.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM,12
FM and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
push-button memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the push-button
twice.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE:
Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
4
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 10 seconds of the current selection.
MUTE Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the
speakers. ⬙MUTE⬙ will be displayed. Press the MUTE
button a second time and the sound from the speakers
will return. Rotating the volume control, turning the
radio ON/OFF, or turning OFF the ignition will also
return the sound from the speakers.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading, and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD / EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/ EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD aftera2minutetimeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 10 seconds. If no discs are inserted
within 10 seconds “NO DISCS LOADED” will be dis-
played.
On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and
ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
4
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons1-6(CDMODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files, however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
4
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 Audio
Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
MP3 File. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays
the beginning of the MP3 file. Pressing the button within
the first ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
LOAD/ EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙LOAD DISC⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading.
LOAD / EJECT - Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJECT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the radio will play the next CD aftera2minutetimeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
MSG or INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to
⬙elapsed time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the
message display priority mode or elapsed time display
priority mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the MP3 selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/ PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons1-6(CDMode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
4
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES威) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate Video Entertainment System (VES威)
Guide.
SALES CODE RAK – AM/FM/CASSETTE/CD
(6-DISC) RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE
RADIO, HANDS FREE PHONE, VIDEO, MP3, and
WMA CAPABILITIES
NOTE:
The radio sales code is located on the lower
right side of your radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Press the ON/VOL control to turn the radio ON. Press
the ON/VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio.
RAK Radio
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Mode Button (Radio Mode)
Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the
CD player, Cassette, Satellite, or Vehicle Entertainment
System (VES) (if equipped).
SEEK Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either AM/FM or Satellite (if equipped) mode.
Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left
side to seek down. The radio will remained tuned to the
new station until you make another selection. Holding
the button and will bypass stations without stopping
until you release it.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds (satellite
scan 8 seconds) at each listenable station before continu-
ing to the next. To stop the search, press SCAN a second
time.
Time Button
Press the time button and the time of day will display for
5 seconds.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the time button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune/
Audio control.
3. After the hours are adjusted, press the right side
Tune/Audio control to set the minutes. The minutes will
begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune/Audio
control.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait 5 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
4
INFO Button (Radio Mode)
Press the INFO button for an RBDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast (if available) from an FM station (FM
mode only).
RW/FF (Radio Mode)
Pressing the rewind/fast forward button causes the tuner
to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
arrows. This feature operates in either AM, FM or Satel-
lite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control (Radio Mode)
Turn the right side rotary control to increase or decrease
the frequency.
AM/FM Button (Radio Mode)
Press the button to select AM or FM Modes.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display.
Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or
decrease the Bass tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Mid Range tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE
will display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
increase or decrease the Treble tones.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will
display. Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to
adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak-
ers.
Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone,
balance, and fade.
RND/PTY Button (Radio Mode)
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5-second time
out, the PTY icon will turn off. Turning the tune knob
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
Turn the tune knob to select the following format types:
Program Type
16 Digit-Character Dis-
play
No program type or un-
defined
None
News News
Information Information
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Rock Rock
Classic Rock Classic_Rock
Adult Hits Adult_Hits
Soft Rock Soft_Rock
Top 40 Top_40
Country Country
Oldies Oldies
Soft Soft
Nostalgia Nostalgia
Jazz Jazz
Classical Classical
Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft_R_&_B
Foreign Language Foreign_Language
Religious Music Religious_Music
Religious Talk Religious_Talk
Personality Personality
Public Public
College College
Unassigned
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
4
NOTE:
If you have selected a PTY with the tune knob,
simply pressing the tune button in will go directly to a
“PTY seek”.
Buttons1-6(Radio Mode)
These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you
commit to push-button memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
left and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
NOTE:
When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Tape Eject
Press this button and the cassette will disen-
gage and eject from the radio.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press Preset 6. The lighted arrow in the
display window will show the new direction.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization.
Pinch Roller Release
If ignition power or the radio ON/OFF switch is turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press
Preset 1 after you insert the tape. The NR light in the
display will go off when the Dolby System is off.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction is manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation.
Operation Instructions - (CD MODE for CD Audio
Play)
NOTE:
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
NOTE:
Note: This Radio is capable of playing compact
discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable
compact discs (CD-RW) compact discs with MP3 tracks
and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks
and WMA.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
4
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4 3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
SEEK Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next
selection on the CD. Press the left side of the button to
return to the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is
within the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
SCAN Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for CD Audio
Play)
LOAD/EJECT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the LOAD/EJT button for 5 seconds and
all CDs will be ejected from the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
TIME Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
TUNE Control (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone,
Fade, and Balance. See Radio Mode.
AM/FM Button (CD MODE for CD Audio Play)
Switches the Radio to the Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (Random Play Button) (CD
MODE for CD Audio Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
NOTE:
MP3 and WMA Random Play are for file folders
only.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
4
Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the
tracks. Release the FF button to stop the fast forward
feature. If the RW button is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Buttons1-6(CDMODE for CD Audio Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of directory levels: 15
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders: 100
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a
3-character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.mp3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.mp3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz)
Bit rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 and WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 and WMA files may
be affected by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
4
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the Disc at Once option before
writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - (CD Mode for MP3 and
WMA Audio Play)
SEEK Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next
file. Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the
beginning of the file. Pressing the button within the first
ten seconds plays the previous file.
LOAD/EJECT Button (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA
Play)
LOAD/EJT - Load
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD is being loaded. The radio will display
PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT
DISC. After the radio displays ⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the
CD into the player.
The radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the
disc is loading.
LOAD/EJT - Eject
Press the LOAD/EJT button and the push-
button with the corresponding number where
the CD was loaded and the disc will unload
and move to the entrance for easy removal.
Radio display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc
is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD after a 2-minute timeout.
If the CD is removed and there are no other CD’s in the
radio, the radio will remain in CD mode and display
⬙INSERT DISC” for 2 minutes. After 2 minutes, the radio
will go to the previous tuner mode.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press and INFO button while playing MP3 or WMA disc.
The radio scrolls through the following TAG information:
Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if avail-
able).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button while in the message
display priority mode or elapsed time display priority
mode will display the song title for each file.
RW/FF (CD Mode for MP3 and WMA Play)
Press the FF side of the button to move forward through
the file or MP3 and WMA selection.
TUNE Control (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of
Tone, Balance, and Fade.
AM/FM Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Switches back to Radio mode.
RND/PTY Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing this button plays files randomly.
SET/DIR Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Press the SET/DIR Button to display folders, when
playing an MP3 discs that have a file/folder structure.
Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or
move through available folders. Press the TUNE control
to select a folder.
Buttons1-6(CDMode for MP3 Play)
Selects disc positions1-6forPlay/Load/Eject.
Operating Instructions - Hands Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Phone” in Section 3 of the Owner’s
Manual.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the “Satellite Radio” section of the Owner’s
Manual.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
4
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)
Guide.”
SALES CODE REC — AM/FM/CD (6–DISC) RADIO
WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Satellite Navigation Radio with CD Player with MP3
Capability (REC) - combines a Global-Positioning
System-based navigation system with an integrated color
screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection
menus and instructions for selecting a variety of destina-
tions and routes, AM/FM stereo radio and six-disc CD
changer with MP3 capability.
Mapping information for navigation is supplied on a
DVD that is loaded into the unit. One map DVD covers
all of North America. Refer to your “Navigation User’s
Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
Refer to “Setting the Clock” under ”System Settings” in
your Navigation User’s Manual for details about setting
the clock.
REC Radio
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers over 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
System Activation
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-
tion available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REF Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and Time buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the
twelve-digit ESN/SID number will be displayed. Press
the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits.
Continue to press the SEEK UP button until all twelve
ESN/SID digits have been displayed. The SEEK DOWN
will page down until the first four digits are displayed.
The radio will exit the ESN/SID mode when any other
button is pushed, the ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes
has passed since any button was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With RAQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
4
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/SID
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
ESN/SID Access With Navigation Radios
Please refer to your Navigation User’s Manual.
Selecting Satellite Mode in REF, and RAQ, Radios
Selecting Satellite Mode — REF Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode — RAQ Radio
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word ⬙SAT⬙
appears in the display.
These radios will also display the current station name
and program type. For more information such as song
title and artist press the MSG or INFO button.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE knob to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ⬙SCAN⬙ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE:
Channels that may contain objectionable con-
tent can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at
888-539-7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or
unblocking. Please have your ESN/SID information
available.
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
PTY Button ⴖSCANⴖ
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
⬙SCAN⬙ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ⬙SCAN⬙
button a second time to stop the search.
NOTE:
Pressing the ⬙SEEK⬙ or ⬙SCAN⬙ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
PTY Button ⴖSEEKⴖ
When the desired program is obtained, press the ⬙SEEK⬙
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna. The luggage rack (if
equipped), should also not be positioned directly above
the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
4
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. Pressing the top of the switch will
increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set push-buttons.
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
4
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being ON in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Controls
The Climate Control System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere.
Climate Control Location
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The controls are as follows:
Fan Control
Use this control to regulate
the amount of air forced
through the system in any
mode you select. The fan
speed increases as you move
the control to the right from
the OFF position.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
The mode control allows you
to choose from several pat-
terns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the
symbols, or a blend of two of
these modes. The closer the
control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you receive from that
mode.
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
air flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor out-
lets.
NOTE:
There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best
in cold or snowy conditions that require extra
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
4
heat at the windshield. This setting is good for main-
taining comfort while reducing moisture on the wind-
shield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with
maximum fan and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE:
The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
the Air Conditioning Snowflake button is not pressed.
This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To
improve fuel economy, use these modes only when
necessary.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
air flow.
NOTE:
For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen-
gers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate
the temperature of the air in-
side the passenger compart-
ment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler tem-
peratures while the red area
indicates warmer tempera-
tures.
NOTE:
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning
Use this button to engage the
Air Conditioning. A lamp will
illuminate when the Air Con-
ditioning System is engaged.
NOTE:
The air conditioning compressor will not en-
gage until the engine has been running for about 10
seconds.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the
A/C and recirculate buttons
at the same time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
4
Circulation Control
Use this button to choose be-
tween outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside
the vehicle. A lamp will illu-
minate when you are in recir-
culate mode. Only use the re-
circulate mode to temporarily
block out any outside odors,
smoke, or dust and to cool the
interior rapidly upon initial
start up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE:
Continuous use of the recirculate mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
NOTE:
Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor,
mix or defrost modes.
Air Filtration System – If Equipped
An air filter is included in the optional Security Group.
Filter media includes a particle filtration layer and a
charcoal layer. The filter will reduce, but not eliminate,
diesel and agricultural smells. The filter acts only on air
coming from outside the vehicle; it does not filter air
inside the passenger compartment. The filter’s normal
service life is 12,000 miles (20,000 km) or one year. The air
filter change schedule coincides with that for engine oil
and filter. As with oil changes, the interval is shorter for
heavy duty service or dusty conditions. See your autho-
rized dealer for service.
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
4
Window Fogging
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, set mode
to the mix or defrost position. Direct the panel outlets
toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate without
A/C for long periods as fogging may occur.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by using the defrost position.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect-
ing on the inside surface of the glass
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recircu-
late position will cause windows to fog on the
inside because of moisture build up inside the
vehicle. For maximum defogging, press the
recirculation button until recirculate is off.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for
protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is
recommended.
Outside Air Intake
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, directly in front of the wind-
shield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
vehicle operation.
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures
....................208
▫ Automatic Transaxle ...................208
▫ Manual Transaxle .....................208
▫ Normal Starting ......................208
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) ................209
▫ If Engine Fails To Start .................209
▫ After Starting ........................210
䡵 Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped
........210
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System .......211
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition
Interlock System ......................212
▫ Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable
Automatic Transaxle (Cvt) ...............212
▫ Fuel Economy/Performance
Operation Feature .....................213
䡵 AutoStick — If Equipped
................214
▫ AutoStick Operation ...................214
▫ AutoStick General Information ............215
䡵 Manual Transaxle Operation
..............215
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds ..............216
▫ Downshifting ........................217
䡵 All Wheel Drive System — If Equipped
.....217
䡵 Parking Brake
.........................218
5
䡵 Brake System
.........................219
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) —
If Equipped .........................220
䡵 Power Steering
........................223
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces
.............224
▫ Acceleration .........................224
▫ Traction ............................224
䡵 Tire Safety Information
..................225
▫ Tire Markings ........................225
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) ..........228
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........229
䡵 Tires — General Information
..............233
▫ Tire Pressure .........................233
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures .................234
▫ Radial-Ply Tires ......................236
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped .........236
▫ Limited Use Spare — If Equipped .........237
▫ Tire Spinning ........................237
▫ Tread Wear Indicators ..................238
▫ LifeOfTire .........................239
▫ Replacement Tires .....................239
▫ Alignment And Balance .................240
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) —
If Equipped
..........................241
▫ Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Operation – If Equipped ..........241
▫ Premium System – If Equipped ...........242
▫ General Information ...................246
䡵 Tire Chains
...........................247
䡵 Snow Tires
...........................247
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations
...........247
䡵 Fuel Requirements
.....................248
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Gasoline Engines .....................248
▫ Reformulated Gasoline .................249
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............249
▫ MMT In Gasoline .....................249
▫ Materials Added To Fuel ................250
▫ Fuel System Cautions ..................250
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings ..............251
䡵 Adding Fuel
..........................252
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............252
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............253
䡵 Vehicle Loading
.......................254
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......254
䡵 Trailer Towing
........................255
▫ Common Towing Definitions .............255
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification ...............256
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .........257
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............258
▫ Towing Requirements ..................259
▫ TowingTips .........................263
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.)
................264
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind
Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four
Wheels On The Ground) ................264
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
5
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or
sleep in your car. Accidents can be caused by inad-
vertently moving the gear selection lever or by
pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause exces-
sive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in over-
heating and vehicle fire which may cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Automatic Transaxle
The gear selector must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE:
You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of Park.
Manual Transaxle
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the gear
selector in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
NOTE:
If key won’t turn and steering wheel is locked,
rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on
the locking mechanism and then turn the key.
Normal Starting
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the “START’” position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
Extremely Cold Weather (below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
5
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
The Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle
(CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This may
sometimes ⬙feel⬙ as if it is slipping, but this is normal and
does not harm anything.
Automatic Shift Lever
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE:
You MUST press and hold the brake pedal
down while shifting out of Park.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC positions. Always depress the
brake pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of
PARK.
NOTE:
If a malfunction occurs, the transaxle will not
shift out of park. Battery power is required to release the
brake/transmission interlock system. There is a remov-
able plug in the right side of the shifter housing that
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
5
allows you to insert your finger to override the system. If
this occurs obtain service as soon as possible.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions, and
the brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE:
If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Gear Ranges For Continuously Variable
Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
“P” Park
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis-
sion. The engine can be started in this range. Never use P
(Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always
apply the parking brake first, and then place the selector
in P (Park) position.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
shift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement. Further-
more, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P
(Park) position:
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
When shifting into P (Park), firmly move the lever all
the way forward until it stops.
•
Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
•
You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift
lever out of the P (Park) position.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), you
must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the
steering wheel and shift lever are released. Other-
wise, damage to the steering column or shifter could
result. You must also depress the brake pedal.
“R” Reverse
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
“N” Neutral
Engine may be started in this range.
“D”
This should be used for most driving and provides the
best ratio for optimum driveability, fuel economy, and
performance.
“L” Low
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, the trans-
axle will ratio up only to prevent transaxle damage or
engine over speed while ratioing down will occur as
early as possible
Fuel Economy/Performance Operation Feature
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel economy/
performance operation feature. This feature provides a
noticeable detent (bump/step) in accelerator pedal
movement when the accelerator pedal is near full
throttle. Pressing the accelerator pedal past this detent
changes the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
calibration to a ⬙maximum performance⬙ mode. Keeping
the accelerator pedal before this detent keeps the vehicle
in an “economy mode” of operation. The change from
economy to performance is most noticeable at speeds
above 50 mph (80 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
5
NOTE:
After pushing beyond the detent (bump/step)
and entering “maximum performance” mode, the CVT
will no longer operate in the economy mode, but will
increase the engine speed up to 6000 RPM. The engine
speed will remain at this high RPM while the vehicle
accelerates.
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
six manual ratio changes to provide you with more
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations. Automatic
ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the
Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle (CVT) and or
the engine from overspeed and changes down will only
happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stalling.
Autostick Operation
NOTE:
Autostick is not functional until the CVT warms
up in cold weather.
Autostick operation is activated in the ⬙D⬙ position by
moving the shift lever side to side. Moving the lever to
the (+) side will activate Autostick and shift up to the
next higher manual ratio, unless you are already operat-
ing in or near overdrive in which case, 6th ratio will be
selected. In like manner, moving the lever to (-) will
activate Autostick and shift to the next lower manual
Autostick Shifter
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
ratio. After Autostick is activated, the manual ratio
selected is displayed in the transmission ratio display
and tipping the lever to the (+) or (-) direction will cause
an upshift or downshift by one ratio.
Autostick is deactivated:
•
By holding the lever to (+) momentarily.
•
When the shift lever is shifted out of ⬙D.⬙
•
When in 6 position, touching the lever to the right.
•
When heavy Anti-lock brake system (ABS) application
is detected.
Autostick General Information
•
If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will
automatically select the 1st gear ratio.
•
If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transaxle will automatically select the
next higher ratio.
•
If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
Mostly the CVT will stay in the manually selected
ratio, however.
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•
If the system detects a problem it will disable the
Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
5
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-
tor pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transaxle is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in THIRD.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, 5th gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE:
During cold weather, until the transaxle lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in table.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE RECOMMENDED SHIFT
SPEEDS
IN mph (km/h)
EN-
GINE
SIZE
AC-
CEL-
ERA-
TION
RATE
1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5
ALL
EN-
GINES
Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)
Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
5 - Speed Shift Pattern
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
All Wheel Drive System — If Equipped
This feature provides full time, on-demand, All Wheel
Drive (AWD).
The system is automatic with no driver gear selection or
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
automatically to the rear wheels to equalize front and
rear wheels speeds. The greater the front wheel traction
loss the greater the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
sent to the rear in a preemptive effort to improve vehicle
launch and performance characteristics.
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
5
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the Brake Light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
NOTE:
This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The
chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle
has returned to a stop.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position
(automatic transaxle) or Reverse (manual transaxle). To
release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal, pull up
slightly on the lever, then depress the button on the end
of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the
floor.
NOTE:
The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of Park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a
uphill grade.
You should always apply the parking brake before leav-
ing the vehicle.
Parking Brake Lever
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
5
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
indicator will light.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance
or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an acci-
dent. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
•
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not function-
ing. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
5
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
•
The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
•
the clicking sound of solenoid valves,
•
brake pedal pulsations,
•
and a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the
end of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated
electronic equipment that may be susceptible to
interference caused by improperly installed or high
output radio transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking
capability. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power
steering pump may make noise for a short amount of
time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and
it does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the
end of the steering wheel travel will increase the
steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided
when possible. Damage to the power steering pump
may occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
5
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
•
LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary Spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
5
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
215 = Section Width in Millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—⬙R⬙ means Radial Construction.
—⬙D⬙ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions (i.e. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
5
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire;
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location. (2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size. (2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer. (1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured. (2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
“B” pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
and spare tires.
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
5
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” sec-
tion of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to the
“Vehicle Loading” section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capaci-
ties of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865
lbs. (392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
5
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
1. Safety—
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can
result in tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
5
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consump-
tion.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side “B”
pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
Tire Placard Location
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12 °F (7 °C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68 °F (20 °C) and the
outside temperature = 32 °F (0 °C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12 °F (7 °C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
5
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6 of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 inch (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident result-
ing in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an autho-
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
5
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combina-
tions of unapproved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance charac-
teristics, resulting in changes to steering, han-
dling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause
unpredictable handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose control
and have an accident resulting in serious injury or
death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
Fast tire wear.
•
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
— IF EQUIPPED
Base Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Operation – If Equipped
This is the Tire Pressure Monitoring System warn-
ing indicator located in the instrument cluster.
•
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will
warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the
vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
•
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12 °F (6.5 °C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pres-
sure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for
more than 3 hours - and in outside ambient tempera-
ture. Refer to the “Tires – General Information” in this
section for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as
the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should
be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
•
The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pres-
sure warning threshold for any reason, including low
temperature effects.
•
The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire pres-
sure must be increased to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPM warning lamp to
be turned off. The system will automatically update
and the TPM warning lamp will extinguish once the
updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than 3 hours) placard of 35 °F (241
kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68 °F (20 °C) and the
measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature
drop to 20 °F (-7 °C) will decrease the tire pressure to
approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
5
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light”. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will still be ON. In this
situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn
OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important, for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver Module
•
4 Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•
3 Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four wheel
wells)
•
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
•
Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lamp will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects. In
addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will display a graphic of the pressure value(s)
with the low tire(s) flashing.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Settings
•
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
NOTE:
These display settings may not be available due
to Regulatory Authorities. In this case, the display will
only show approved units.
NOTE:
A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Lamp to illuminate or the chime to
sound.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value. The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flash-
ing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp will extin-
guish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been re-
ceived. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this infor-
mation.
Check TPM System Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 60 seconds, and an audible chime will sound
when a system fault is detected. The flash cycle will
repeat every ten minutes, without an audible chime, until
the fault condition no longer exists.
Low Tire Pressure Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
5
The EVIC will display the “CHECK TPM SYSTEM”
message for 3 seconds. This text message is then followed
by a graphic, with “- -“ displayed for the pressure value
indicating which of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sen-
sor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
TEM⬙ text message will no longer display.
Display Settings
•
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
NOTE:
These display settings may not be available due
to Regulatory Authorities. In this case, the display will
only show approved units.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare wheel and tire assembly that does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore, it will not be
monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
In the event that the compact spare tire is swapped with
a low pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp” to be
ON, a chime to sound, and the Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC) will still show the low tire pressure
value flashing on the graphic display. However, driving
the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h)
will display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message on
the EVIC. This text message will then be followed by a
graphic, with “- -“ in place of the flashing low pressure
value. For every subsequent key cycle, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Lamp” will be ON, a chime will sound, a
Check TPM System Display
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
“CHECK TPM SYSTEM” text message will be display in
the EVIC, and the graphic display will have “- -“ in place
of the pressure value of the spare tire location. Once the
original road tire has been properly repaired, and put
back onto the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire.
The TPMS will update the graphic display on the EVIC
with a new tire pressure value instead of “- -“, and the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Lamp” will be OFF as long as
none of the road tire(s) are below the low pressure
warning threshold. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use tire sealant from a can, or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to
the sensors may result.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the wheel rim sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
5
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale lamp.
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPM system will monitor the actual tire
pressure in the tire.
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States ..................... KR5S120123
Canada ........................2671-S120123
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
5
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested
rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
diagram.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
GASOLINE ENGINES
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended. The use of premium gaso-
line will provide no benefit over high quality regular
gasolines, and in some circumstances, may result in
poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
5
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/her gasoline contains MMT.
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
•
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
5
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left rear
quarter panel of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
CAUTION!
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Door
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and will cause the malfunction indi-
cator light to turn on.
NOTE:
Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “GASCAP”
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this manual. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer/trip
odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBDII” in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
5
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
WARNING!
•
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the fuel cap is removed or the
tank filled.
VEHICLE LOADING
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants ....................... 2
Rear Seat Occupants ....................... 3
Luggage ....................... 175lbs.(80kg)
Vehicle Rated Capacity............ 925lbs.(420 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes the weigh of your vehicle, the driver,
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue weight. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The gross trailer weight (GTW) is the weight of the trailer
plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its
⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The recom-
mended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded
trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer
must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The gross combination weight rating (GCWR) is the total
permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings in-
clude a 68 kg (150 lbs) allowance for the presence of a
driver).
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
5
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the
trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or
more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The maximum height and maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch includes a receiver attached
to the tow vehicle, plus a removable hitch head and
spring bar assembly that fits into the receiver opening
and hook up brackets that connect the spring bars to the
trailer frame.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your
given drivetrain.
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
ClassI-LightDuty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note
1)
2.0L Auto 22 Sq. Ft. (2.04 Sq. m) 1000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
2.4L Auto 22 Sq. Ft. (2.04 Sq. m) 1000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
1.8L Manual 22 Sq. Ft. (2.04 Sq. m) 1000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
2.4L Auto/Man with
Trailer Tow Prep Pack-
age (AHC)
32 Sq. Ft. (3.0 Sq. m) 2000 lbs (907 kg) 300 lbs (136 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
5
Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard in the Tire Safety Information Section of this manual
for the maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driv-
etrain components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles (805
km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage
your vehicle.
•
During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR,
or GCWR, ratings.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes,
axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chas-
sis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
5
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
P for Park. With a manual transmission, shift the
transmission into reverse. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the
trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
Towing Requirements — Tires
−
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
−
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to the
Tires–General Information section of this manual on
Tire Pressures for proper tire inflation procedures.
−
Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
−
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to the Tires–General
Information section of this manual on Tread Wear
Indicators for the proper inspection procedure.
−
When replacing tires refer to the Tires–General Infor-
mation section of this manual on Replacement Tires for
proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires
with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
−
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
−
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
−
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
5
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights & Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may includea4and7pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
4 - Pin Connector
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
−
Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put transmission
in neutral and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
7- Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
5
−
Refer to Cooling System Operating information in the
Maintenance section of this manual for more informa-
tion.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
towing with all four wheels on the ground)
CAUTION!
DO NOT FLAT TOW any continuously variable
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (CVT) equipped ve-
hicles or any ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) equipped
vehicles. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If
these vehicles require towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
NOTE:
ONLY Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
equipped with MANUAL TRANSAXLES may be recre-
ationally towed (flat towed) at any legal highway speed,
for any distance if the transaxle is in neutral.
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
.................266
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats
................266
䡵 Automatic Transaxle Overheating
..........267
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing
...............268
▫ Jack Location ........................268
▫ Spare Tire Stowage ....................268
▫ Preparations For Jacking ................269
▫ Jacking Instructions ....................269
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures Due To
A Low Battery
........................272
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
.................274
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle
...............275
▫ With Ignition Key .....................275
▫ Without The Ignition Key ...............276
6
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The flasher switch is located on the instrument
panel, below the radio. Depress the switch and
both cluster indicators and all front and rear
directional signals will flash. Depress the
switch again to turn Hazard Warning Flashers off.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE:
With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
•
On the highways — Slow down.
•
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle
with the engine at idle, when safe. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off imme-
diately and call for service.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
Hazard Warning Flasher
266 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle,
when safe. Turn the air conditioner off and wait until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. After
appropriate action has been taken, if the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately,
and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of
this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transaxle oil may
become too hot.
If this happens, the transmission overheat in-
dicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the automatic transaxle
cools down enough to allow a return to the
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating will reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 267
6
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
268 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
•
Block both the front and rear
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench, and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 269
6
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in step 3.
3. There are two front jacking locations and two rear
jacking locations on each side of the body. The front
locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear
ones by two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped
with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose
the jacking locations in the body.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed. Do not raise the vehicle until you
are sure the jack is securely engaged.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
270 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
NOTE:
The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly
align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel
cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 271
6
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW
BATTERY
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way and may be damaged.
Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter
and once the engine has started, ignite and damage
the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a dis-
charged battery, booster cables may be used to ob-
tain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully.
WARNING!
Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously
injured.
NOTE:
Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in
the On position will cause vehicles with an automatic
transaxle (CVT2) to go into “default mode” and turn on
the malfunction indicator light. See your authorized
dealer to correct this condition.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-
matic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEU-
TRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.
272 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Remove the air intake duct covering the battery, using
the two finger screws on the cover.
5. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis-
charged battery.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area
immediately with large quantities of water.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output that exceeds
12 volts.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of
the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good
contact.
7. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi-
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 273
6
8. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
9. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-
quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the
vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres-
sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle, tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
And don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
274 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Automatic And Manual Transaxle
Front-wheel-drive vehicles must have the front wheels
elevated; all-wheel-drive vehicles must be hauled on a
flatbed truck.
All Transaxles
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY posi-
tion, not in the LOCK position.
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing vehicle to flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 275
6
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
Battery power is required to release the brake/
transmission interlock system. There is a removable plug
in the right side of the shifter housing that allows you to
insert your finger to override the system.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the driv-
etrain will result.
276 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — Gasoline Engines
...279
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II
......280
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............280
䡵 Emissions Inspection And
Maintenance Programs
..................281
䡵 Replacement Parts
.....................282
䡵 Dealer Service
........................282
䡵 Maintenance Procedures
.................283
▫ Engine Oil ..........................283
▫ Drive Belt – Check Condition .............286
▫ Spark Plugs .........................286
▫ Catalytic Converter ....................287
▫ Crankcase Emission Control System ........288
▫ Fuel Filter ..........................288
▫ Air Cleaner Element (Filter) ..............288
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery ................289
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance .............290
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check ............291
▫ Front Suspension Ball Joints ..............291
▫ Body Lubrication .....................292
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades ................292
▫ Windshield Washer Reservoir .............292
▫ Exhaust System ......................293
7
▫ Cooling System .......................294
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses .......298
▫ Fuel System Connections ................298
▫ Brake System ........................298
▫ Automatic Transaxle (Cvt) ...............301
▫ Manual Transaxle .....................302
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (Rda )–
AWD/4WD Models Only ...............302
▫ Power Transfer Unit (Ptu) –
AWD/4WD Models Only ...............303
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion ......................303
䡵 Fuses/Integrated Power Module (IPM)
......307
䡵 Vehicle Storage
........................310
䡵 Replacement Bulbs
.....................310
䡵 Bulb Replacement
......................311
▫ Headlights/Front Parking/
Front Turn Signal .....................311
▫ Fog Lights ..........................311
▫ Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And
Backup Lights — Replacement ............312
▫ License Lights ........................314
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight ...........315
䡵 Fluids And Capacities
...................316
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts
.......317
▫ Engine .............................317
▫ Chassis ............................318
278 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — GASOLINE ENGINES
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 279
7
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transaxle control systems. When these systems are oper-
ating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent per-
formance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
•
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is loose or improperly
installed. A GASCAP message will be displayed in the
instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until a ⬙clicking⬙
sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is
properly tightened. Press the trip odometer reset button
to turn off the message. If the problem persists, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
280 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). Resolving the prob-
lem will turn the MIL light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states, which have an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 281
7
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or
start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD
system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine Mopar威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283
7
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a cross-
hatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and
MAX at the high end of the range. Adding one quart of
oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated
range will result in the oil level at the full end of the
indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine as
indicated by the range markings, as described above,
on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration,
which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase
in oil temperature. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
•
Stop and Go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Engine Oil Dipstick
284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Trailer towing.
•
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-Road or desert operation.
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this
manual.
If none of these apply to you, then change your engine
oil at every interval shown on schedule “A” in the
maintenance schedule section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
Engine Oil Selection (Gasoline Engines)
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
tified and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low tempera-
ture starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil
filler cap also states the recommended engine oil vis-
cosity grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285
7
such a product, use only those oils that are American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recom-
mended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance
schedule that describes your driving type.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Drive Belt – Check Condition
At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules,
check the drive belt for condition.
Inspect the drive belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace belt if any sign of damage which
could result in belt failure.
The belt is self-tensioning and will not need adjustment.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
plug. Refer to the Engine data Label located under the
hood for the proper type of spark plug for use in your
vehicle.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287
7
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for prolonged period.
Crankcase Emission Control System
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. The fuel
filters are located inside the fuel tank. See your dealer for
service.
Air Cleaner Element (Filter)
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive
the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions,
the filter element should be inspected periodically and
replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule
“B”.
288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
CAUTION!
When servicing the battery, always reinstall the
battery thermowrap. The thermowrap provides bat-
tery heat protection and will extend overall battery
life. Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in
evaporative loss of the battery fluid.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289
7
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage as battery
damage can result.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid types.
Front Suspension Ball Joints
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when-
ever under vehicle service is done. Damaged seals and
their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must
be replaced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
7
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors, liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
2. Push the release tab and slide the wiper blade assem-
bly down along the arm. Gently place the wiper arm on
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.
Windshield Washer Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the right side and should be
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze).
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to Exhaust Gas in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
7
Cooling System
WARNING!
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
coolant type.
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Mixing of coolants other than specified Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolants,
may result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT coolant is intro-
duced into the cooling system in an emergency, it
should be replaced with the specified coolant as
soon as possible.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
⫺34°F (⫺37°C ) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant solution.
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
7
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines, shown on the
bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
•
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
7
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-
ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure the are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.
Fuel System Connections
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio-
rated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-
nance Section.
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake And Power Steering System Hoses
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particu-
lar attention should be made to examining those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
NOTE:
Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-
sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
NOTE:
Inspection of brake hoses should be done
whenever the brake system is serviced and at every
engine oil change.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
7
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Manual
Transaxle , the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to
both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System.
The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak
in one system will not affect the other system. The
Manual Transaxle Clutch Release System should not
require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If
the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low, and the brake system
does not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be
a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System.
See your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard pro-
longed braking. You could have an accident.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle.
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid as seal damage will result!
Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid which has been formulated with special metal to
metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper
steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys. Refer
to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid will cause belt slip and
result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct
fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked only by a trained technician.
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule located if section 8 of
this manual for the correct change interval for your type
of driving.
Special Additives
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
to Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) Fluid
(CVTF+4). CVTF+4 is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
7
Manual Transaxle
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for
correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more that 3/16” (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
following conditions exist:
•
The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If
contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed
immediately.
•
If severe usage has occurred, refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B” in Section 8 of this manual.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA )– AWD/4WD Models
Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained be-
tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm)
below the fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule located if section 8 of
this manual for the correct change interval for your type
of driving.
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models
Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only manufacturers recommended fluid. Refer to
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts for correct fluid
type.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspected the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained be-
tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 inch (4 mm)
below the fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule located if section 8 of
this manual for the correct change interval for your type
of driving.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
7
•
Stone and gravel impact.
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using Mopar Car Wash or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear
water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar Super Kleen Bug and
Tar Remover to remove.
•
Use Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to match the
color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil, use Mopar Wheel Cleaner or select a nonabra-
sive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel
wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only Mopar
cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
finish.
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
YES Essentials威 seats may be cleaned in the following
manner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply Mopar威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply Mopar威 Multi-purpose
cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a
fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
•
Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen-
tials products.
Interior Care
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
7
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-
type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window
equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter
window equipped with the radio antenna. Do not use
scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not
spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft tissue.
FUSES/INTEGRATED POWER MODULE (IPM)
An Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A label that
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
section of the owner’s manual for the underhood location
of the Integrated Power Module (IPM).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
7
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
1 Empty Empty
2 15 Amp
Lt. Blue
AWD/4WD ECU
Feed
3 10 Amp
Red
CHMSL Brake Switch
Feed
4 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Switch Feed
5 20 Amp
Yellow
Trailer Tow
6 10 Amp
Red
IOD Sw/Pwr Mir/
Ocm Steering Cntrl
Sdar/Hands Free
Phone
7 30 Amp
Green
IOD Sense1
8 30 Amp
Green
IOD Sense2
9 40 Amp
Green
Power Seats
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
10 20 Amp
Yellow
CCN Power Locks
11 15 Amp
Lt Blue
Power Outlet
12 20 Amp
Yellow
Ign Run/Acc Inverter
13 20 Amp
Yellow
Pwr run/Acc Outlet
RR
14 10 Amp
Red
IOD CCN/ Interior
Lighting
15 40 Amp
Green
RAD Fan Relay Bat-
tery Feed
16 15 Amp
Lt. Blue
IGN Run/Acc Cigar
Ltr/Sunroof
17 10 Amp
Red
IOD Feed Mod-Wcm
18 40 Amp
Green
ASD Relay Contact
PWR Feed
19 20 Amp
Yellow
PWR Amp 1 & Amp
2 Feed
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
20 15 Amp
Lt. Blue
IOD Feed Radio
21 10 Amp
Red
IOD Feed Intrus
Mod/Siren
22 10 Amp
Red
IGN RUN Heat/AC/
Compass Sensor
23 15 Amp
Lt. Blue
ENG ASD Relay Feed
3
24 15 Amp
Lt. Blue
Power Sunroof Feed
25 10 Amp
Red
Heated Mirror
26 15 Amp
Lt. Blue
ENG ASD Relay Feed
2
27 10 Amp
Red
IGN RUN Only ORC
Feed
28 10 Amp
Red
IGN RUN ORC/OCM
Feed
29 Hot Car (No Fuse Re-
quired)
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
30 20 Amp
Yellow
Heated Seats
31 10 Amp
Red
Headlamp Washer
Relay Control
32 30 Amp
Pink
ENG ASD Control
Feed 1
33 10 Amp
Red
ABS MOD/J1962
Conn/PCM
34 30 Amp
Pink
ABS Valve Feed
35 40 Amp
Green
ABS Pump Feed
36 30 Amp
Pink
Headlamp /Washer
Control / Smart Glass
37 25 Amp
Natural
110 Inverter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
7
CAUTION!
•
When installing the Integrated Power Module
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop-
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the Integrated Power
Module, and possibly result in an electrical sys-
tem failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage
rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than
indicated may result in a dangerous electrical
system overload. If a properly rated fuse contin-
ues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
You may:
•
Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
•
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number
Front Header Lamp ...................... T578
Center Dome Lamp ......................T578
Rear Cargo/Flashlight .................8–A35LF
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside Bulb No.
Low Beam/High Beam Headlight ............H13
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side
Marker Light .......................3157NAK
Front Fog Light ......................... 9145
Center High Mounted Stop
Light (CHMSL) ..................LEDAssembly
Rear Tail/Stop ..........................3157
Rear Turn Signal ...................... 3157AK
Backup Light .....................W16W(921)
License Light .......................... W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights/Front Parking/Front Turn Signal
See your Authorized Dealer for replacement.
Fog Lights
1. Access lamp through the lower fascia cutout.
2. Rotate bulb and connector 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull bulb off of connector.
Fog Light and Connector
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
7
Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup Lights
— Replacement
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.
Removing Push-Pins
Push-Pins Removed
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the
lamp from the aperture panel.
3. Twist and remove socket from lamp.
Pulling Lamp From Body
Removing Socket and Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
7
4. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
License Lights
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.
Removing Bulb From Socket
Prying Lamp from Liftgate
314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise. 3. Pull bulb from socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplight
Light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer for
replacement.
Removing Socket from Lamp Removing Bulb From Socket
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315
7
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate) 13.5 Gallons 51.0 Liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
All Gasoline Engines (Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine
Oil.)
4.5 Quarts 4.26 Liters
Cooling System *
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Miles Formula), or
equivalent.
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Filter Mopar威 04884900AB or equivalent.
Spark Plugs Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R + M)/2
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317
7
Chassis
Component Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transaxle (CVT) Fluid Mopar威 CVTF + 4
Manual Transaxle Fluid Mopar威 ATF+4 MS9602
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) Mopar威 Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent non-
synthetic product.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Mopar威 Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE 80W-90 API GL 5 or equivalent non-
synthetic product.
Brake Master Cylinder Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir Mopar威 Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar威ATF+4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid.
318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE:
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and systems on your vehicle
may be performed by any automotive repair establish-
ment or individual using any automotive part, which has
been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of
California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
There are two maintenance schedules that show the
required service for your vehicle.
First is Schedule “B”. It is for vehicles that are operated
under the conditions that are listed below and at the
beginning of the schedule.
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32 °F (0 °C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90 °F (32 °C).
•
Trailer towing.
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
Heavy Loading
320 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
Second is Schedule “A”. It is for vehicles that are not
operated under any of the conditions listed under Sched-
ule ⬙B⬙.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add, if
required.
Once a Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 321
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
•
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake/
clutch master cylinder, and manual transaxle and add
as needed.
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the exhaust system.
•
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Inspect the CV joints (if equipped) and front suspen-
sion components.
•
Check the manual transmission fluid level (if
equipped).
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
CAUTION!
Do not check the automatic transaxle fluid. It must
be check by a trained service technician every 15,000
miles and if required only the recommended fluid
be added. Refer to the section “Fluids, Lubricants
And Genuine Parts” for the proper fluid.
322 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Schedule “B”
Follow schedule “B” if you usually operate your vehicle
under one or more of the following conditions.
•
Day or night temperatures are below 32 °F (0 °C).
•
Stop and go driving.
•
Extensive engine idling.
•
Driving in dusty conditions.
•
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90 °F (32 °C).
•
Trailer towing.
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
•
Off-road or desert operation.
•
Heavy Loading
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
NOTE:
If ANY of these apply to you then change your
coolant every 102,000 miles (170 000 km) or 60 months,
whichever comes first and follow schedule “B” of the
⬙Maintenance Schedules⬙ section of this manual.
SCHEDULE “B” 323
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 3,000 6,000 9,000 12,000 15,000
(Kilometers) (5 000 ) (10 000 ) (15 000) (20 000) (25 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XX
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
324 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 18,000 21,000 24,000 27,000 30,000
(Kilometers) (30 000) (35 000) (40 000) (45 000) (50 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XXX
Inspect brake linings. X
Replace air cleaner filter. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
SCHEDULE “B” 325
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 33,000 36,000 39, 000 42,000 45,000
(Kilometers) (55 000) (60 000) (65 000) (70 000) (75 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XX
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
326 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 48,000 51,000 54,000 57,000 60,000
(Kilometers) (80 000) (85 000) (90 000) (95 000) (100 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Change Automatic Transaxle (CVT) Fluid and Filter X
Change Manual Transaxle Fluid. X
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. X
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. X
Rotate tires. X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XXX
Inspect brake linings. X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, or
102,000 miles (170 000 km) whichever comes first.
X
SCHEDULE “B” 327
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 63,000 66,000 69,000 72,000 75,000
(Kilometers) (105 000) (110 000) (115 000) (120 000) (125 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XX
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
X
328 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 78,000 81,000 84,000 87,000 90,000
(Kilometers ) (130 000) (135 000) (140 000) (145 000) (150 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXX
Rotate tires. X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
XXX
Inspect brake linings. X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
SCHEDULE “B” 329
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 93,000 96,000 99,000 102,000
(Kilometers) (155 000) (160 000) (165 000) (170 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3 months
whichever comes first.
XXXX
Change Manual Transaxle Fluid. X
Rotate tires. X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60
months.
X
330 SCHEDULE “B”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 105,000 108,000 111,000 114,000 117,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (175 000) (180 000) (185 000) (190 000) (195 000) (200 000)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, or at 3
months whichever comes first.
X X XXXX
Change Automatic Transaxle (CVT) Fluid and
Filter
X
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. X
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. X
Rotate tires. X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-
rect stowage.
XXX
Inspect brake linings. X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. XX
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
Replace the Accessory Drive Belt. X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not re-
placed at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
X
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-
turer to the owner, but not required to maintain the
emissions warranty.
SCHEDULE “B” 331
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Schedule “A”
Miles 6,000 12,000 18,000 24,000 30,000
(Kilometers) (10 000) (20 000) (30 000) (40 000 ) (50 000)
[Months] [6] [12] [18] [24] [30]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
X X XXX
Inspect brake linings. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. XX
Replace spark plugs. X
332 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 36,000 42,000 48,000 54000 60,000 66,000
(Kilometers) (60 000) (70 000) (80 000) (90 000) (100 000) (110 000)
[Months] [36] [42] [48] [54] [60] [66]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X X
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. X
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. X
Rotate tires. X X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and cor-
rect stowage.
X X XXXX
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
months, if not replaced at 102,000 miles (170
000 km).
X
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if
necessary.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
SCHEDULE “A” 333
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 72,000 78,000 84,000 90,000 96,000
(Kilometers) (120 000) (130 000) (140 000) (150 000) (160 000)
[Months] [72] [78] [84] [90] [96]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X X
Rotate tires. X X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct
stowage.
X X XXX
Inspect brake linings. X X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if neces-
sary.
XX
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
334 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Miles 102,000 108,000 114,000 120,000
(Kilometers) (170 000) (180 000) (190 000) (200 000)
[Months] [102] [108] [114] [120]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter. X X X X
Change Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) fluid. X
Change Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid. X
Rotate tires. X X X X
Check spare tire for proper pressure and correct stowage. X X X X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 60
months.
X
Flush and replace engine coolant, if not done at 102,000
miles (170 000 km)
X
Inspect brake linings. X
Replace the Accessory Drive Belt. X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter, replace if necessary. X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X
Replace spark plugs. X
Inspect PCV valve, replace as necessary.** X
** This maintenance is recommended by the manufac-
turer to the owner, but not required to maintain the
emissions warranty.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
SCHEDULE “A” 335
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
336 SCHEDULE “A”
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service
For Your Vehicle
.......................338
▫ Prepare For The Appointment ............338
▫ Prepare A List ........................338
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests .............338
䡵 If You Need Assistance
..................338
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only)
...340
䡵 Mopar威 Parts
.........................340
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects
.................341
▫ In Canada ..........................341
䡵 Publication Order Forms
.................341
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades
........................342
▫ Treadwear ..........................343
▫ Traction Grades ......................343
▫ Temperature Grades ...................343
9
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to your selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
338 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Dealership name
•
Vehicle identification number
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 339
9
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
340 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect, which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash-
ington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
http://www.NHTSA.gov.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE:
A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 341
9
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, dia-
grams, and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
CallTollFreeat:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
VisitusontheWorldWideWebat:
•
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
•
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
342 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 343
9
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
344 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ............. 220
Accelerator Pedal ....................... 213
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ......... 295
Adding Fuel .......................... 252
Adding Washer Fluid ................. 108,133
Additives, Fuel ........................ 250
Air Cleaner, Engine
(Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ................ 288
Air Conditioner Maintenance .............. 290
Air Conditioning Controls ................ 198
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ........... 203
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ........... 290,291
Air Conditioning System .............. 198,290
Air Pressure, Tires ...................... 234
Airbag ................................ 39
Airbag Deployment ...................... 49
Airbag Light ...................... 52,62,145
Airbag Maintenance ...................... 51
Airbag, Side ........................... 47
Alarm System (Security Alarm) .......... 24,145
Alignment and Balance .................. 240
All Wheel Drive (AWD) .................. 217
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............ 6
Antenna, Satellite Radio .................. 195
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ......... 294,316,317
Capacities ........................... 316
Disposal ............................ 296
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......... 117,220
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ...... 24
Appearance Care ....................... 303
Automatic Door Locks .................. 16,17
Automatic Transaxle ........... 9,208,210,267,301
Fluid Level Check ..................... 301
Interlock System .................... 14,212
Overheating ......................... 267
Selection Of Lubricant ................. 301
Shifting ............................ 212
Special Additives ..................... 301
Autostick ............................. 214
BallJoints ............................ 291
Battery ............................... 289
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 23
Belts,Drive ........................... 286
Beverage Cooler ........................ 134
Body Mechanism Lubrication .............. 292
346 INDEX
B-Pillar Location ....................... 229
Brake Assist System ..................... 118
Brake Control System, Electronic ........... 118
BrakeFluid ........................... 318
Brake, Parking ......................... 218
Brake System ....................... 219,298
Anti-Lock (ABS) ................... 117,220
Hoses .............................. 299
Master Cylinder ...................... 300
Parking ............................ 218
Warning Light ....................... 150
Brakes ............................ 219,298
Brake/Transmission Interlock .............. 211
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ...... 61
Bulb Replacement .................... 310,311
Bulbs,Light ........................... 310
Calibration, Compass .................... 160
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ...... 316
Capacities, Fluid ....................... 316
Caps, Filler
Fuel ............................... 252
Oil (Engine) ...................... 279,285
Car Washes ........................... 304
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 251
Cargo Area Cover ...................... 130
Cargo Area Features ..................... 128
Cargo Compartment
Light .............................. 128
Luggage Carrier ...................... 134
CargoLight ........................... 128
Cargo Load Floor ....................... 130
Cargo Tie-Downs ....................... 130
Carrier, Luggage ....................... 134
Catalytic Converter ..................... 287
Caution, Exhaust Gas ..................... 61
CD (Compact Disc) Player .......... 162,169,180
CD (Compact Disc) Player Maintenance ...... 197
Cellular Phone ....................... 72,198
Center High Mounted Stop Light ........... 315
Chains, Tire ........................... 247
Changing A Flat Tire .................... 268
Chart,TireSizing ....................... 226
Check Engine Light
(MalfunctionIndicatorLight) .............. 281
Child Restraint ......................... 54
INDEX 347
10
Child Restraint Tether Anchors ............. 57
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts ......... 56
Child Safety Locks ....................... 18
Child Seat ............................. 59
Clean Air Gasoline ...................... 249
Cleaning
Wheels ............................. 305
Climate Control ........................ 198
Clock .................... 161,164,170,181,192
Clutch ............................... 300
ClutchFluid ........................... 300
CoinHolder ........................... 127
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ........... 197
Compact Spare Tire ..................... 236
Compass ............................. 160
Compass Calibration .................... 160
Compass Variance ...................... 158
Console .............................. 127
Contract, Service ....................... 340
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 316,317
Cooler, Beverage ....................... 134
Cooling System ........................ 294
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ............. 295
Coolant Level ..................... 294,297
Disposal of Used Coolant ............... 296
Drain, Flush, and Refill ................. 294
Inspection ........................... 297
Points to Remember ................ 296,297
Pressure Cap ........................ 296
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 294
CorrosionProtection .................... 303
Crankcase Emission Control System ......... 288
CruiseLight ........................... 148
CupHolder ........................... 127
Customer Assistance .................... 338
Data Recorder, Event ..................... 52
Dealer Service ......................... 282
Defroster, Rear Window .................. 134
Defroster, Windshield ............... 62,199,200
Delay(Intermittent)Wipers ............... 108
Detent ............................... 213
Diagnostic System, Onboard ............... 280
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ................ 105
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............. 296
348 INDEX
Engine Oil .......................... 286
Door Locks ............................ 14
Door Locks, Automatic ................... 16
Door Opener, Garage .................... 112
Downshifting .......................... 217
DriveBelts ............................ 286
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .................... 96
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces .................. 224
Economy ............................. 213
Electric Remote Mirrors ................... 70
Electrical Power Outlets .................. 124
Electronic Brake Control System ............ 118
Brake Assist System ................... 118
Electronic Stability Program ............. 119
Traction Control System ................ 118
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 109
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) .......... 119
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) ......................... 152
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking ............................. 268
Jump Starting ........................ 272
Towing ............................. 275
Emission Control System Maintenance .... 281,320
Engine ............................... 279
Break-In Recommendations ............... 61
Checking Oil Level .................... 283
Cooling ............................ 294
Exhaust Gas Caution .................. 251
Fuel Requirements .................... 248
Jump Starting ........................ 272
Oil .......................... 283,316,317
Oil Change Interval ................... 284
Oil Filler Cap ..................... 279,285
Oil Filter ............................ 317
OilSelection ......................... 285
Oil Synthetic ......................... 285
Overheating ......................... 266
Temperature Gauge ................... 144
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ......... 50
Event Data Recorder ..................... 52
Exhaust Gas Caution ............. 27,61,251,293
Exhaust System ........................ 293
INDEX 349
10
Fabric Care ........................... 305
Filler Location Fuel ..................... 144
Filters
Air Cleaner .......................... 288
Engine Fuel ......................... 288
Engine Oil ....................... 286,317
Flashers .............................. 266
Hazard Warning ...................... 266
Turn Signal .......................... 312
Flat Tire Stowage ....................... 271
Flooded Engine Starting .................. 209
Fluid, Brake ........................... 318
Fluid Capacities ........................ 316
Fluid Leaks ............................ 63
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle ................... 301
Fluids ............................... 317
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ........ 317
FogLights ...................... 104,149,311
Fog Lights, Rear ........................ 152
Folding Rear Seat ....................... 99
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) ................. 99
FreeingAStuckVehicle .................. 274
Fuel .............................. 248,317
Adding ............................. 252
Additives ........................... 250
Capacity ............................ 316
CleanAir ........................... 249
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ................ 144,252
Filler Door (Gas Cap) .................. 144
Filter .............................. 288
Gasoline ............................ 248
Gauge ............................. 144
Hoses .............................. 298
Light .............................. 145
OctaneRating ........................ 248
Requirements ........................ 248
System Hoses ........................ 298
Tank Capacity ........................ 316
Fuel System Caution .................... 254
Fueling .............................. 252
Fuses ................................ 307
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) .......... 112
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ........... 252,253,280
Gasoline, Clean Air ..................... 249
350 INDEX
Gasoline (Fuel) ..................... 248,316
Gasoline, Reformulated .................. 249
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .................. 144
Fuel ............................... 144
Odometer ........................... 147
Tachometer .......................... 144
Gearshift ............................. 212
General Information ................. 13,93,246
General Maintenance .................... 283
Glass Cleaning ......................... 306
Glove Compartment ..................... 134
GrossAxleWeightRating ................. 255
GrossVehicleWeightRating ............ 254,255
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) ............ 72
Hazard Warning Flasher .................. 266
Head Restraints ......................... 96
Headlights ............................ 311
Cleaning ............................ 306
High Beam ....................... 105,150
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...... 105
Passing ............................. 106
Replacing ........................... 311
Switch ............................. 103
Heated Seats ........................... 97
Hitches
TrailerTowing ....................... 256
HomeLink威
(Garage Door Opener) Transmitter .......... 112
Hood Release .......................... 101
Hoses ............................... 298
Ignition ................................ 9
Key ................................. 9
Ignition Key Removal ..................... 9
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................ 11,25
InfantRestraint ......................... 54
Information Center, Vehicle ............... 152
Inside Rearview Mirror ................... 69
Instrument Cluster ................... 142,144
Instrument Panel and Controls ............. 141
Instrument Panel Cover .................. 307
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............ 307
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ........... 307
Interior Appearance Care ................. 305
INDEX 351
10
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ......... 108
Introduction ............................ 4
Jack Location .......................... 268
Jack Operation ...................... 268,269
Jacking Instructions ..................... 269
Jump Starting ......................... 272
Key, Programming ....................... 12
Key, Replacement ....................... 12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) .................. 11
Key-In Reminder ........................ 10
Keyless Entry System (Sedan) .............. 19
Keys .................................. 9
Lane Change and Turn Signals .......... 149,312
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...................... 29
Latches
Hood .............................. 101
Lead Free Gasoline ...................... 248
LifeofTires ........................... 239
Liftgate (Sedan) ......................... 26
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ............ 132
LightBulbs ........................... 310
Lights ............................. 63,102
Airbag ......................... 52,62,145
Back-Up ............................ 312
BrakeWarning ....................... 150
Bulb Replacement ..................... 311
Cargo .............................. 128
Center Mounted Stop .................. 315
Daytime Running ..................... 106
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .............. 103
Electronic Stability Program
(ESP) Indicator .................... 119,121
Engine Temperature Warning ............ 146
Fog .......................... 104,149,311
Headlight Switch ..................... 103
Headlights .......................... 103
High Beam Indicator ................... 150
Instrument Cluster .................... 103
License ............................. 314
Lights On Reminder ................... 104
Low Fuel ........................... 145
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ...... 148
Map Reading ........................ 102
352 INDEX
Oil Pressure ......................... 145
Rear Fog ............................ 152
Seat Belt Reminder .................... 145
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............. 25
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ............ 145
Traction Control ...................... 119
Turn Signal ................. 103,105,149,312
Voltage ............................. 145
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 144
Loading Vehicle ........................ 254
Tires ............................... 229
Locks
ChildProtection ....................... 18
Door ............................... 14
Power Door .......................... 15
Steering Wheel ........................ 13
Lubrication, Body ....................... 292
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) ................ 134
Lumbar Support ........................ 95
Maintenance Free Battery ................. 289
Maintenance, General .................... 283
Maintenance Procedures .................. 283
Maintenance Schedule ................... 320
Schedule “A” ........................ 332
Schedule “B” ........................ 323
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ...................... 148,281
Manual, Service ........................ 341
Manual Transaxle ................. 208,215,302
Downshifting ........................ 217
Fluid Level Check .................. 302,303
Frequency of Fluid Change ........... 302,303
Lubricant Selection ................. 302,303
Map/Reading Lights .................... 102
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ................. 300
Mirrors ............................... 69
Electric Powered ....................... 70
Outside ............................. 69
Rearview ............................ 69
Vanity .............................. 71
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............ 6
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ............. 241
Mopar Parts ........................ 282,340
Multi-Function Control Lever .............. 103
INDEX 353
10
Navigation Radio ....................... 192
Navigation System ...................... 192
New Vehicle Break-In Period ............... 61
Occupant Classification System (OCS) ........ 44
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ................ 28
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............. 248
Odometer ............................ 147
Trip ............................ 147,148
Oil, Engine ......................... 283,316
Capacity ............................ 316
Change Interval ...................... 284
Checking ........................... 283
Disposal ............................ 286
Filter .............................. 286
Identification Logo .................... 285
Materials Added to .................... 286
Recommendation .................. 285,316
Synthetic ........................... 285
Viscosity ............................ 285
Oil Pressure Light ...................... 145
Onboard Diagnostic System ............ 280,281
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) ......... 112
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .......... 4
OutsideAirIntake ...................... 204
Overdrive ............................ 213
Overheating, Engine ..................... 266
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ....... 4,341
PaintCare ............................ 303
Panic Alarm ........................... 21
Parking Brake ......................... 218
Passing Light .......................... 106
Performance ........................... 213
Personal Settings ....................... 155
Pets .................................. 60
Phone, Cellular ......................... 72
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) ............ 72
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ....... 229
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) .............. 307
Door Locks .......................... 15
Mirrors ............................. 70
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ........ 124
Steering ......................... 223,291
Steering, Checking .................... 291
354 INDEX
Sunroof ............................ 122
Transfer Unit ........................ 303
Windows ............................ 27
Power Steering Fluid .................... 318
Power Transfer Unit ..................... 303
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ............. 39
Preparation for Jacking ................... 269
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ............................ 37
Programmable Electronic Features ..... 113,116,155
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .............. 22,113,116
Radial Ply Tires ........................ 236
Radio Broadcast Signals .................. 160
Radio, Navigation ...................... 192
Radio Operation ............... 162,169,180,198
Radio, Satellite ...................... 192,193
Radio (Sound Systems) ............. 162,169,180
Rear Axle (Differential) ................... 302
Rear Drive Assembly .................... 302
Rear Fog Lights ........................ 152
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) ..................... 26
Rear Seat, Folding ....................... 99
Rear Window Defroster .................. 134
Rear Window Features ................... 132
Rear Wiper/Washer ..................... 132
Recorder, Event Data ..................... 52
Recreational Towing ..................... 264
Refrigerant ............................ 291
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................... 37
Remote Control
Door Locks .......................... 19
Security Alarm ........................ 24
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) .............. 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ...... 196
Replacement Bulbs ...................... 310
Replacement Keys ....................... 12
Replacement Parts ...................... 282
Replacement Tires ...................... 239
Reporting Safety Defects ................. 341
Restraints,Child ...................... 54,59
Restraints,Infant ........................ 54
Retractable Cargo Area Cover .............. 130
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) ................ 134
Rotation,Tires ......................... 247
INDEX 355
10
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ............... 62
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle .............. 62
Safety Defects, Reporting ................. 341
Safety Information, Tire .................. 225
SafetyTips ............................. 61
Satellite Radio ...................... 192,193
Satellite Radio Antenna .................. 195
Schedule, Maintenance ................... 320
Seat Belt Maintenance ................... 307
Seat Belt Reminder ...................... 37
Seat Belts
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ................ 33
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ...... 33
And Pregnant Women .................. 39
Child Restraint ........................ 54
Front Seat ............................ 29
Pretensioners ......................... 37
Rear Seat ............................ 29
Reminder ........................... 145
Seat Belts (Sedan) ....................... 28
Seats ................................. 94
Adjustment .......................... 94
Cleaning ............................ 305
Head Restraints ....................... 96
Heated .............................. 97
Lumbar Support ....................... 95
Rear Folding ......................... 99
Rear Folding (Sedan) ................... 99
Seatback Release ....................... 96
Tilting .............................. 96
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............... 24
SelectionofOil ........................ 285
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................ 11,25
Sentry Key Programming .................. 12
Service and Maintenance ................. 320
Service Assistance ...................... 338
ServiceContract ........................ 340
Service Manuals ........................ 341
Setting the Clock ........... 162,164,170,181,192
Settings, Personal ....................... 155
Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle ............ 216
Shoulder Belts .......................... 29
Side Airbag ............................ 47
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) ......... 204
Signals, Turn .......................... 312
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On ............. 224
356 INDEX
Snow Tires ............................ 247
Spare Tire ....................... 236,237,268
Spark Plugs ........................... 286
Specifications
Oil ................................ 285
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......... 109,148
Speedometer .......................... 144
Speedometer and Odometer ............... 142
Starting .............................. 208
Automatic Transmission ................ 208
Engine Fails to Start ................... 209
Manual Transmission .................. 208
Starting Procedures ..................... 208
Steering
Power ........................... 223,291
TiltColumn ......................... 108
Wheel Lock .......................... 13
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls ........................ 196
Storage .............................. 310
Stuck, Freeing ......................... 274
Sun Roof ............................. 122
Sun Visor Extension ...................... 71
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ....... 39
Synthetic Engine Oil ..................... 285
System, Navigation ..................... 192
Tachometer ........................... 144
Taillights ............................. 312
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ...... 144,267
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint .............. 57
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ............... 24
Theft System (Security Alarm) .............. 24
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .................. 130
TiltSteeringColumn .................... 108
Tire and Loading Information Placard ....... 229
Tire Identification Number (TIN) ........... 228
TireMarkings ......................... 225
TireSafetyInformation ................... 225
Tires ........................... 62,233,342
Aging(LifeofTires) ................... 239
Air Pressure ......................... 233
Alignment ..........................240
Chains ............................. 247
Changing ........................... 268
Compact Spare ....................... 236
INDEX 357
10
Flat Changing ........................ 271
General Information ................... 233
High Speed ......................... 235
Inflation Pressures .................... 234
Jacking ............................. 268
LifeofTires ......................... 239
Load Capacity .................... 229,230
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ......... 241
Quality Grading ...................... 342
Radial ............................. 236
Replacement ......................... 239
Rotation ............................ 247
Safety ........................... 225,233
Sizes ............................... 226
Snow Tires .......................... 247
Spare Tire ........................... 268
Spinning ............................ 237
TreadWearIndicators .................. 238
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ............. 258
Towing .............................. 255
Disabled Vehicle ...................... 275
Guide .............................. 257
Recreational ......................... 264
Weight ............................. 257
Traction .............................. 224
TrailerTowing ......................... 255
Cooling System Tips ................... 263
Hitches ............................. 256
Minimum Requirements ................ 259
Trailer and Tongue Weight .............. 258
Wiring ............................. 262
TrailerTowingGuide .................... 257
TrailerWeight ......................... 257
Transaxle ............................. 210
Automatic ................... 9,208,210,301
Autostick ........................... 214
Manual ........................ 10,208,215
Operation ........................... 210
Overdrive ........................... 213
Selection of Lubricant .................. 301
Transmission
Range Indicator ...................... 146
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................... 23
Transmitter, Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink威) .................... 112
358 INDEX
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) ................... 22
Transporting Pets ........................ 60
TreadWearIndicators ................... 238
Trip Odometer ......................... 147
Trip Odometer Reset Button ............... 148
Turn Signals ..................... 105,149,312
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ............ 72
Understanding Your Instrument Panel ....... 141
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .............. 342
Universal Transmitter .................... 112
Unleaded Gasoline ...................... 248
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses ................ 298
VanityMirrors .......................... 71
Variance, Compass ...................... 158
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .......... 6
Vehicle Loading ..................... 230,254
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 6
Vehicle Storage ......................... 310
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ......... 24
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) ............ 144
WarningsandCautions .................... 6
WarrantyInformation .................... 340
Washer, Adding Fluid ................. 108,133
Washers, Windshield .................... 106
Washing Vehicle ........................ 304
Wheel Alignment and Balance ............. 240
Wheel and Wheel Trim ................... 305
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ............... 305
WindBuffeting ........................ 124
Window Fogging ....................... 204
Windows .............................. 27
Power .............................. 27
Windshield Washers ..................... 106
Windshield Wipers ................... 106,292
Wiper Blade Replacement ................. 292
Wipers,Intermittent ..................... 108
YES Essentials威 Fabric Cleaning Procedure .... 305
INDEX 359
10
NOTES
